JP2021007856A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 can set a jackpot probability in which a jackpot lottery results in a jackpot from among a plurality of mutually different jackpot probabilities, and can display the set jackpot probability (game setting value) on a 7-segment display part 39. Display contents regarding a jackpot probability on the 7-segment display part 39 are controlled according to the number of game balls (the number of special out balls) entering a special out ball port 373 from beginning of a jackpot game to initial winning or an opening/closing execution mode to completion of the opening/closing execution mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

Some game machines such as pachinko game machines and slot machines have a plurality of game setting values having different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-024234

By the way, as a game machine, it is important to raise the degree of attention and interest in the game to improve the player's motivation to play.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of increasing the degree of attention and interest in a game and improving the player's motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
Profit information regarding the profit status of the player in the progress of the game (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode Profit information display means (39,341) that can display (etc.) and
A display control means (51) that controls display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) according to the number of times of a specific condition satisfied in a predetermined period.
With
The specific condition is characterized in that it is satisfied when a specific event occurs during the progress of the game.

The perspective view which shows an example of the structure of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the game machine shown in FIG. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the game machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing an example of an opening / closing door provided on the game board shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing door, a croon device, and a game ball staying portion provided in the game board shown in FIG. Perspective view of the Kroon device. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the X1-X1 cutting line of FIG. The figure for demonstrating the predetermined period in which a game ball is retained in a game ball retention part. 10 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line of FIG. 8, and FIGS. 10 (B) and 10 (C) are cross-sectional views taken along the X3-X3 cutting line of FIG. FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the game set value and the display example of the 7-segment display unit. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of the game machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of the main control device of the game machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of a main control unit. The figure which shows an example of the performance information display device of a main control unit schematically. The figure which shows the display example on the performance display monitor of a performance information display device. The figure which shows the display example in the game setting value display part of the performance information display device. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the main timer interrupt process of FIG. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the first hold command setting process executed in the start winning process of FIG. 21. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control unit. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variable game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of data setting processing executed in the variable game control processing of FIG. 24. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variation start processing executed in the variation game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting value change processing executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update processing executed in the main processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the base information which is updated by the specific performance information update process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 33. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st stop symbol selection table and the variation type table used when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 35. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 35. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game setting value display process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 35. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process executed in the game setting value display process of FIG. 38. FIG. 40 (A) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the lighting state or the extinguishing state of each segment in the 7-segment display unit and the displayed numerical value, and FIGS. 40 (B) and 40 (C) are the 7-segment display unit control of FIG. 39. The figure which shows an example of the control order pattern type selection table used in processing. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game effect processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game setting value display process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control processing executed in the game setting value display processing. FIG. 45 (A) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the alphabet displayed on the 7-segment display unit of the game machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention and the game set value, and FIG. 45 (B) is the diagram on the 7-segment display unit. The figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the lighting or extinguishing state of each segment, and the display alphabet. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a control order pattern type selection table used in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 39. FIG. 47 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an ending screen in a jackpot game with a game machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 47 (B) is a game set value display face image display order (number of special out balls). The figure which shows an example (correspondence relation with a display part). The figure which shows the correspondence relationship between a game setting value and a game setting value display face image. Game setting value display The figure which shows an example of the display pattern of a face image. Game setting value display The figure which shows an example of the display pattern of a face image. Game setting value display The figure which shows an example of the display pattern of a face image. Game setting value display The figure which shows an example of the display pattern of a face image. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game setting value display process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of face image display processing executed in the game setting value display processing of FIG. 53. FIG. 55 (A) is a diagram showing an ending screen in a modified example of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 55 (B) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a game set value and a game set value image. FIG. 56 (A) is a diagram showing an ending screen in a modified example of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 56 (B) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a game set value and a set image. FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram showing an ending screen in a jackpot game with a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 57 (B) is an image erasing order (steps (number of special out balls and erased image). Correspondence relationship))) is shown in an example. The figure which shows an example of the erasing pattern of a game set value image. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game setting value display process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting value image display processing in the game setting value display processing of FIG. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the expected ball output value and the expected ball output value face image in the game machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by a voice lamp control device. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a ball output expected value display process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 62. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of face image display processing in the ball ejection expected value display processing of FIG. 62.

Hereinafter, the first to sixth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings, and the present invention will be understood. Further, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40.

[Outline configuration of game machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the game machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the game machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 31 of the game machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-back, left-right, and up-down expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-back direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is provided on an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other gaming machines such as a rotating body type gaming machine (slot machine), an arrange ball gaming machine, and a Jiyan ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine.

[Structure of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) that switches an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later according to the presence or absence of a pressing operation. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is executed triggered by an operation on the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined specific period in the variable game production executed in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is clearly shown to the player. Operation buttons Operated to execute effects.

The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position of the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable to provide a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation by the player of the touch key. Further, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 in the variable game effect is reflected in the operation button effect and the like.

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game ball. In the game machine 10, a basic game is performed by firing a game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

The upper plate 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a row. It is used to guide the game ball launch mechanism 32. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used for storing the game balls surplus in the upper plate 23.

The panel 25 is colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and perform an audio output effect for outputting audio. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as an indicator lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect according to a blinking mode such as a lighting color, lighting or extinguishing.

[Structure of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launch mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, the description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for the sake of simplification of the illustration.

The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the game machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, and an out opening 318. , A variable display unit 34, a Kroon device 37, a game ball retention unit 38, and a 7-segment display unit 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game ball that did not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 is discharged from the out opening 318. Will be done.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321 and a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 is formed on the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 one by one onto the launch rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for launching the game ball supplied on the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for launching the game ball by using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 are formed with openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. Then, on the back side of the game board 31, the entry of the game ball can be individually detected corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 12) are provided. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the out opening 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31, and the out ball sensor 35 described later. (See FIG. 12). Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided in the central portion on the right side of the game board 31, and a game ball launched in the right area of the game board 31 can enter the ball. The game ball that has passed through the opening 35 of the variable winning opening 316 is guided to the Kroon device 37 by the taxiway 316c (see FIG. 6) described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which the game ball can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) capable of individually detecting the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball launched in the right area of the game board 31 passes through the through gate 317, and the second winning opening is triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball at the through gate 317. A lottery is executed to decide whether or not to open 315.

The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35 and the special out ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35 and the special out ball sensor 35. The detection result of the ball sensor 384 is input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the game ball according to the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, the detection of the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 35. The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of launched game balls launched on the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32.

Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) determines that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 described later. The special out-ball detection command shown is set, and this special out-ball detection command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. 23. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, and the special out ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the ball entry of a game ball by another detection method. Any sensor may be used.

Further, the second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening of the electric accessory 315b enables the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 315, and the closing of the electric accessory 315b allows the gaming ball to enter the second winning opening 315. The sphere is restricted.

Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 319 for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. The opening / closing door 319 is opened / closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening / closing door 319 enables the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316, and the opening / closing door 319 restricts the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. The door. The opening / closing door 319 is moved to a position where the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and is otherwise waited at a position where the variable winning opening 316 is closed. As a result, the game ball 99 launched in the right area of the game board 31 in the round game in the jackpot game can enter the variable winning opening 316.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the opening / closing door 319 has a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of attachment portions 319d for rotatably attaching the opening / closing door 319 to the game board 31, and projects slightly upward from the game board 31 when the opening / closing door 319 is in the operating position. .. As a result, the opening / closing door 319 can receive the game ball 99 discharged from the first passage 374 and the second passage 375 of the distribution device 37 described later when it is in the operating position. The pair of guard walls 319b extend at the left and right edges of the base 319a to prevent the game ball 99 received by the base 319a from spilling from the left and right sides of the base 319a. Further, the pair of guides 319c guide the game ball 99 received by the base 319a to the variable winning opening 316. The pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable winning opening 316, forming a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. Further, the variable winning opening 316 has a penetrating portion 316b that discharges the game ball 99 received by the opening / closing door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. The penetrating portion 316b communicates with the taxiway 316c provided on the back side of the game board 31. The taxiway 316c extends in the vertical direction D2 and has a lower opening. Then, the game ball 99 received by the opening / closing door 319 is entered into the variable winning opening 316 and guided to the Kroon device 37 via the penetrating portion 316b and the taxiway 316c. The taxiway 316c is provided with the above-mentioned ball entry sensor 316a. As a result, the game ball 99 entered into the variable winning opening 316 is detected when it passes through the penetrating portion 316b and is introduced into the taxiway 316c.

In the game machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is detected by the entry sensor 314a or the entry sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a big hit lottery. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. Further, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 and the like according to the lottery result.

Further, in the game machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entry sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls will be paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of winning balls when entering the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is 3, and the number of winning balls is entered into the variable winning opening 316. If so, the number of prize balls is 13. In particular, in the game machine 10, when the lottery result performed by the main control unit 331 is a big hit, the game shifts to the big hit game state (special game state), and the variable winning opening 316 is opened, which will be described later in the round game (unit game). ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times and 16 times), so that a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Further, when the game ball wins in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, the jackpot lottery is executed. Then, when the lottery result is won, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and a 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. In the 5R jackpot game state, there are five round games (unit games) in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until a maximum number (for example, 9) or more game balls are won in the variable winning opening 316. It is a gaming state including an opening / closing execution mode to be performed. The 16R probability variation jackpot game state is a game state including an open / close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot game state, and more than in the 5R jackpot game state. It is an advantageous gaming state for the player.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display that is visibly arranged through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol variation display and the variable game according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the entry into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. Various displays such as an effect display are performed. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is performed by, for example, scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" in order in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or symbols may be displayed between the main symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine types of main symbols "1" to "9".

In the game machine 10, in the variable game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols stops after the lapse of the preset variation display time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341. .. More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols fluctuate along the preset fluctuation directions (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the fluctuations of the plurality of main symbols are stopped in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

When the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is completed, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are lined up on one or a plurality of effective lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol clearly or suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot", the state in which the main symbols of the same symbol are lined up in the effective line is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that it is a jackpot. Will be done. In addition, the jackpot type may be specified by the combination of the main symbols on the effective line, but it is not always specified. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", a state in which, for example, "777" symbol combinations set as a symbol combination indicating 16R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols are lined up in an effective line. Is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same symbols other than "777" are lined up on the effective line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", a state in which symbol combinations such as "333", which are set in advance as symbol combinations indicating 5R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols, are lined up in the effective line is displayed. Or, a state in which the same combination of symbols other than the combination of symbols indicating 16R probability variation jackpot or 5R probability variation jackpot such as "777" and "333" is lined up in the effective line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the combination of the main symbols other than the symbol combination indicating the normal jackpot, for example, "222" or "444", which indicates the probability variation jackpot, is set. A state in which combinations of the same symbols are lined up on the effective line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "out of place", a state in which different combinations of main symbols are lined up on the effective line (for example, "323" or "723") is displayed.

In addition, the symbol display unit 341 displays a variable display of the main symbol in the variable game and a variable game effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. If the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and a state in which jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of the main symbols indicating 16R probability variation jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed, the 5R probability variation jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. Alternatively, a suggestion effect suggesting that the 5R is a normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variation jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and a state in which jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of the main symbols indicating the probability variation jackpot are lined up on the effective line is displayed, the 5R normal jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. A suggestion effect suggesting that is is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variation jackpot is executed.

Further, when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, the symbol display unit 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

A sub-image display unit 38 such as a liquid crystal display is provided in the left side region on the front side of the design display unit 341. In the sub-image display unit 38, a game effect is executed together with the symbol display unit 341 in a variable game or a jackpot game. In addition, the sub-image display unit 38 executes an effect of suggesting information (performance information) regarding the ball ejection performance in the variable game or the jackpot game to the player. The details of the performance information will be described later, but the performance information includes, for example, a game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number information, base information, continuous bonus ratio information, bonus ratio information, and the like. The sub-image display unit 38 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

Further, it is conceivable to provide the game board 31 with a magnet sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally guiding a game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316 using a magnet is performed, the fraudulent act can be detected. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided around, for example, the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally inputting a radio wave into the ball entry sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entry of a game ball is performed, the fraudulent act can be detected. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

As shown in FIG. 4, the Kroon device 37 puts the game ball entered in the variable winning opening 316 into either the normal out ball opening 378 or the special out ball opening 373 (see FIGS. 7 and 8) described later. It is something to sort. Here, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing door 319, a croon device 37, and a game ball retention portion 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the croon device 37, and FIG. 8 is FIG. It is sectional drawing which follows the X1-X1 cutting line of.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the Kroon device 37 has a dish shape having a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 surrounding the bottom wall 371. The bottom wall 371 is circular in a plan view, and has a high bottom portion 371a, a low bottom portion 371b, and a downward-sloping inclined portion 371c provided between the high bottom portion 371a and the low bottom portion 371b.

The high bottom portion 371a constitutes a right side portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined downward to the right. The high bottom portion 371a is provided with a special out ball passage 374 having a special out ball mouth 373 (special discharge port). The special out ball passage 374 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and extends in the vertical direction D2 at the central portion of the high bottom portion 371a in the front-rear direction D1. The special out ball passage 374 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. Further, a first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retention portion 38. The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375a and a lower opening 375b connected to the lower end of the special out-ball passage 374. The lower opening 375b is provided on the right side of the upper opening 375a, and discharges the game ball 99 of the special out ball passage 374 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball retention portion 38. On the other hand, the game ball retention portion 38 has a retention lane 381 inclined downward to the left as described later. That is, the first guiding member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right portion (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention portion 38. Then, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 does not enter the various winning openings 313 to 316, and does not pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 can no longer be expected to enter the ball or pass through the through gate 317 through the various winning openings 313 to 316, for example, when it has passed through the special out ball mouth 373, or when it is special. When it is introduced into the out ball passage 374, it is treated as an out ball.

The low bottom portion 371b constitutes the left side portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined so as to be low toward the center. The lower bottom 371b is provided with a normal passage 376 having a normal out ball mouth 378. The normal passage 376 is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction D2 at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c, except for a portion along the peripheral wall 372 in the lower bottom portion 371b. The normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99, which has entered through the normal out ball mouth 378, to the back side of the game board 31, and has a semi-cylindrical shape having a larger opening area than the special out ball mouth 373. Is formed in. A second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376. The second guide member 377 collects the game balls 99 passing through the normal passage 376 on the back side of the game board 31 in the same manner as the game balls passing through the opening of the out port 318. Then, the game ball 99 collected by the second guide member 377 is detected by the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 12).

In such a Kroon device 37, a game ball 99 launched into the right region of the game board 31 and received by the opening / closing door 319 as described above is guided by the taxiway 316c. Then, the game ball 99 guided by the Kroon device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372. As a result, the flow of the game ball 99 is delayed in the Kroon device 37. Then, most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 usually have an out ball mouth due to, for example, a decrease in kinetic energy and collision with the peripheral wall 372 of the Kroon device 37 or another game ball 99. Enter the ball at 378. The game ball 99 that has entered the normal out ball mouth 378 moves through the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 and is guided to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, a part of the game balls moving on the bottom wall 371, for example, about 0.5% to 1% (1 to 2 balls in a 16R round game (about 1 ball per 10R minutes in a round game)) The direction of movement is changed due to a collision with the peripheral edge of the out ball mouth 378 or another game ball, and the ball enters the special out ball mouth 373. The game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 is discharged toward the game ball retention portion 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375.

In the present embodiment, the special out ball mouth 373 is provided on the high bottom portion 371a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal out ball mouth 378 has a larger opening area than the special out ball mouth 373. Therefore, the special out ball mouth 373 Is significantly more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter than the normal out ball mouth 378, but in place of or in addition to all or part of these, the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 by other means. It is also possible that 99 makes it difficult to enter the ball. For example, it is conceivable to provide an inhibitory means for inhibiting the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 in the peripheral portion of the special out ball mouth 373. Examples of the blocking means include an obstacle that hinders entry into the special out ball mouth 373, such as a wall surrounding the special out ball mouth 373, and a magnetic force or electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 in the peripheral portion of the special out ball mouth 373. A means for generating a force and a means for forming an air curtain by ejecting air around the special out ball mouth 373 can be considered.

Further, an opening / closing portion for opening / closing the special out ball mouth 373 may be provided, and this opening / closing portion may make it difficult for the game ball to enter the special out ball mouth 373. In this case, the special out ball mouth 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out ball mouth 378, and the normal out ball mouth 378 is formed as having the same or substantially the same opening area as the special out ball mouth 373. May be good.

Further, the means for distributing the game ball 99 entered in the variable winning opening 316 into the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 is not limited to the Kroon device 37, and other means may be used. For example, by adjusting the arrangement of a rotating member such as a switching valve, a rotating member, or a nail placed on the game board 31, the normal out ball mouth 378 and the special out ball mouth 373 may be distributed. ..

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the game ball retention unit 38 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37, and retains the game ball 99 until a predetermined period elapses. Is. Here, FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention unit 38.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the present embodiment, the opening and closing in the normal jackpot game is started after the jackpot game (opening) executed when the lottery result in the low probability mode becomes a jackpot is started in the predetermined period. Until the execution mode ends (ending starts). For example, as shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot (first hit) in the low probability mode is (5R) normal jackpot, opening and closing is executed from the start of the normal jackpot game (opening) during the predetermined period. Until the mode ends (ending starts). That is, when the first hit is a normal jackpot, a predetermined period is set in the normal jackpot game. Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the jackpot (first hit) in the low probability mode is a probability variation jackpot, the probability is high from the start of the probability variation jackpot game (opening) for the first hit during the predetermined period. It is until the opening / closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the mode ends (ending starts). In other words, when the first hit is a probability variation jackpot, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first hit jackpot game to the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the high probability mode, and during the jackpot consecutive villa (in the time saving mode). (Excluding the pullback) will continue for the specified period.

By the way, the game set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 described later. On the 7-segment display unit 39, the number of segments A to G corresponding to the number of game balls 99 (the number satisfying a specific condition) entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37 is turned on or off. Is the control target of. Here, the game ball 99 can enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37 in the jackpot game, but it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball mouth 373. For example, about 0.5% to 1% of the game balls 99 guided by the Kroon device 37 (1 to 2 in a 16R round game (about 1 in 10R minutes of a round game)). Therefore, if the period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention unit 38 is limited to the execution period of one jackpot game machine, the number of segments A to G to be controlled by the 7-segment display unit 39 is small. Not only is it difficult to grasp the game set value, but it is also difficult to guess the game set value.

On the other hand, by setting a predetermined period for retaining the game ball in the game ball retention unit 38 from the first hit to the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the normal jackpot, if the first hit is a probability variation jackpot, the first hit jackpot From the start of the game, a predetermined period is set across the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the high probability mode, and the predetermined period continues during the jackpot consecutive villa (excluding pullback in the time saving mode). As a result, it is expected that more game balls 99 will enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37 and be retained in the game ball retention portion 38 by continuously winning the probability variation jackpot. Therefore, it is expected that the number of segments to be controlled for lighting or extinguishing on the 7-segment display unit 39 increases as the probability variation jackpot continues, so that the game setting value may be confirmed or the game setting value may be increased. There is a high possibility that it can be guessed accurately. As a result, the player not only enjoys the game by expecting that the probabilistic jackpots will be continuous from the aspect of the ball, but also expects that the probabilistic jackpots will be continuous in order to guess or grasp the game set value. You can enjoy the game.

Further, when the jackpot game is started, the game is not ended in the middle of the jackpot game unless there are special circumstances, and the game is not ended in the high probability mode in the high probability mode. Therefore, since the predetermined period is the period from the start of the jackpot game of the first hit to the end of the open / close execution mode of the normal jackpot, it is prevented that the player ends the game before the predetermined period ends. As a result, even if a player who does not know the timing at which the game set value can be estimated or recognized (the end of a predetermined period) advances the game, the game is played immediately before the game set value becomes estimated or recognizable. It is prevented from terminating. Therefore, even a player who cannot know the timing at which the game set value can be estimated or recognized can estimate or recognize the game set value. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena act of another player who plays a game aiming at a timing at which the game set value can be estimated or recognized.

Further, in the present embodiment, 5R probability variation jackpots and 16R probability variation jackpots having different numbers of rounds are set as probability variation jackpots. In this way, when a plurality of probabilistic jackpots with different numbers of rounds (expected ball output) are set, the player expects that the probabilistic jackpot with a large number of rounds (expected ball output) will continue, and the number of rounds. The degree of disappointment is large when it is a probabilistic jackpot with a small (expected value of ball output). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the number of rounds (expected value of ball output) is small, it can be expected that the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373, and the game ball retention portion 38. By continuing the predetermined period for retaining the game ball, the possibility of guessing or grasping the game set value is improved, and the degree of disappointment in the case of a probabilistic jackpot with a small number of rounds (expected ball output value). Can be reduced.

The start of the predetermined period may be a time when the opening / closing execution mode of the first hit is started (the opening of the first hit is finished). On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period may be a time when the jackpot game for the normal jackpot ends (the ending at the jackpot ends) or a time when the time saving mode shifted after the normal jackpot ends. Further, in the present embodiment, the description is based on the premise of a loop probability changing machine, but in other types of gaming machines such as an ST machine, a V-ST machine, and a type 2 type mixer, the predetermined period depends on the mode. It is also possible to set. For example, in the V-ST machine, when there is no V prize at the first hit (normal jackpot), the predetermined period is set as in the case of the normal jackpot of the loop probability change machine, and when there is a V prize at the first hit (probability change jackpot). ), The start of the first hit jackpot game or the opening / closing execution mode is set as the start of the predetermined period, and the end time of the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot without V prize, or the end time of the specified number of jackpot lottery in the high probability mode, etc. It is conceivable that it will be the end of a predetermined period.

It is also conceivable that the predetermined period is set regardless of the jackpot game. For example, the predetermined period can be set according to the type of a specific condition, and stays in the normal game state (the period from the end of the time saving mode to the start of the next jackpot) and the time saving mode. Period (the period from the end of the normal jackpot to the transition to the normal game state), the period of staying in the low probability mode (the period from the end of the normal jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game), high probability The period until a predetermined number of jackpot lottery is received in one or both of the mode and the low probability mode, the period until a predetermined number of lottery is received in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the high probability mode and The period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the general winning opening 313 in one or both of the low probability modes, and a predetermined number of game balls in the first winning opening 314 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. The period until 99 is won, the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the second winning opening 315 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, one of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Alternatively, the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in both, the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are launched into the game board 31 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, and the like. Can be mentioned. Further, it is conceivable to set the start of the predetermined period when the main power supply for the game machine 10 is turned on, depending on the type of specific conditions. Further, the end of the predetermined period may be set when the main power supply for the game machine 10 is turned off, depending on the type of specific conditions.

In addition, if the specific conditions are set regardless of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery or the jackpot game, or regardless of the transition of the game state, the game ball is not inserted into the special out ball mouth 373. It is set as a condition of. For example, the specific condition may be that the game ball 99 passes through a specific area other than the special out ball mouth 373 in the game area set on the game board 31. Specifically, the specific conditions are that a specific number of game balls 99 are won in the general winning opening 313, a specific number of game balls 99 are won in the first winning opening 314, and the second winning opening 315. A specific number of game balls 99 may be won, or a specific number of game balls 99 may pass through the through gate 317.

In addition, as another example of a specific condition, acquisition of a specific number of game balls (balls) in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, and in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Acquiring a specific number of difference balls (including minus difference balls), generating a pending jackpot consecutive villa, and executing a specific effect in a variable game or a jackpot game.

Here, FIG. 10A is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line of FIG. 8, and FIG. 10B is taken along the X3-X3 cutting line of FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 described later is at the upper limit position. FIG. 10C is a cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line of FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 is in the lower limit position. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game ball retention portion 38 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 8 in addition to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 6, 8 and 10, the game ball retention portion 38 includes a retention lane 381, a discharge lane 382, and a stopper portion 383.

The retention lane 381 accepts the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37, and allows the game ball 99 to stay. The upper part of the retention lane 381 is open and is inclined downward to the left. The depth dimension of the retention lane 381 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and at least a part of the game ball 99 retained in the retention lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4). Thereby, it is possible to grasp the number of the game balls 99 stayed in the staying lane 381, that is, the number of the game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37 within a predetermined period. Further, the retention lane 381 is preferably formed transparently with a resin or the like. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of game balls 99 stayed in the staying lane 381. Instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 visible, the number of the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 may be displayed. The number of game balls 99 accumulated in the retention lane 381 may be displayed by, for example, the number of lamps lit, the image display on the symbol display unit 341, or the like.

The discharge lane 382 is continuous with the left end portion of the retention lane 381, and guides the game ball 99 retained in the retention lane 381 to a predetermined portion, for example, a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 12).

Further, the discharge lane 382 is provided with a special out-ball sensor 384. The special out-ball sensor 384 detects when the game ball 99 staying in the staying lane 381 moves in the discharge lane 382. That is, the special out ball sensor 384 counts the number of game balls 99 accumulated in the retention lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37 within a predetermined period. It will be used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out-ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the MPU 41 monitors the output from the special out-ball sensor 384 by the MPU 41. It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has moved in the discharge lane 382. Further, the MPU 41 sets a special out-ball detection command when the game ball 99 is detected by the special out-ball sensor 384, and outputs this special out-ball detection command to the external output of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the process. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls, and the 7-segment display unit 39 displays the number of special out balls and the game set value based on the number of special out balls. Control the display contents.

As the special out-ball sensor 384, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the game ball 99 may be detected by another detection method (for example, an optical sensor). Further, the special out-ball sensor 384 may be connected to the voice lamp control device 5. In this case, the special out-ball detection command is not set in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, but the voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out-balls based on the output from the special out-ball sensor 384.

The stopper portion 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is moved up and down between the upper limit position and the lower limit position by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. .. The upper limit position is a position where the tip portion protrudes upward, and when the stopper portion 383 is in the upper limit position, the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 (see FIG. 10B). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip portion does not protrude upward, and the stopper portion 383 is in the lower limit position so that the game ball 99 of the retention lane 381 can be discharged via the discharge lane 382 (FIG. FIG. 10 (A)). The game ball 99 guided to the discharge lane 382 is guided to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 12).

The means for allowing the game ball 99 to stay in the staying lane 381 and discharging the game ball 99 in the staying lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the stopper portion 383 that can move up and down, for example, a stopper that can move back and forth. The portion may be another means such as a stopper portion that can rotate between the standing state and the prone position. Further, the game ball 99 may be retained by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 may be discharged by canceling the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force. .. Further, by making the retention lane 381 vertically movable, it is possible to realize a state in which the game ball 99 is retained and a state in which the game ball 99 is discharged. For example, the game ball 99 is retained by making the residence lane 381 stand by at a position lower than the discharge lane 382, while the game ball 99 is discharged by moving the retention lane 381 to a position higher than the discharge lane 382. It may be configured to shift to. In addition, the game board 31 is provided with an opening capable of discharging the game ball 99 on the back side of the game board 31, a position where the game ball 99 can be stayed in the retention lane 381, and the game ball 99 is ejected from the opening to the game board 31. The retention lane 381 may be configured to be movable up and down with and from a position where the discharge can be performed on the back side of the Further, by moving the box-shaped movable body instead of the staying lane 381, the game ball 99 can be kept in the movable body and the game ball 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31. It is also possible.

Here, FIG. 11 (A) shows an example of a 7-segment display unit provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, and FIG. 11 (B) shows a correspondence relationship between the game set value and the display example of the 7-segment display unit. It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the 7-segment display unit 39 includes 7 segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each segment A to G and the dot point DP can be turned on and off individually. On the 7-segment display unit 39, the game set value stored in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is lit by a number of segments corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37. It is controlled to turn off. That is, on the 7-segment display unit 39, the game set value is displayed up to the stage according to the number of the game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373. Since the 7-segment display unit 39 can display numbers by the 7 segments A to G, the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37 is 7 or more. In this case, a number indicating the game setting value is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11B, when the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 is 7 or more, and when the game set value is 1. When the segments B and C are lit, the number 1 is displayed, and when the game setting value is 2, the segments A, B, D, E and G are lit to display the number 2, and the game setting. When the value is 3, the numbers 3 are displayed by lighting the segments A to D and G, and when the game setting value is 4, the numbers 4 are displayed by lighting the segments B, C, F and G. Is displayed, and when the game setting value is 5, the segments A, C, D, F and G are lit to display the number 5, and when the game setting value is 6, the segments A, C to G are displayed. When it is lit, the number 6 is displayed.

When the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37 exceeds 7, the number of special out balls is 7 in the lighting state of the 7-segment display unit 39. However, for more than 7 pieces, performance information related to ball ejection performance other than the game set value is provided, for example, by changing the color of the lit segment or lighting in a predetermined pattern. It is also possible to suggest or clarify. In this case, when the number of special out balls exceeds 7, not only the game setting value can be recognized, but also other performance information can be inferred or recognized. As a result, when more than 7 game balls 99 are entered into the special out ball mouth 373, not only the more than 7 game balls 99 are not wasted, but also other game setting values as well as other game balls 99 are not wasted. It becomes possible to provide playability in which performance information can be inferred or recognized.

Here, the segment A can be lit when the game set value is 2, 3, 5 or 6. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is any of 2, 3, 5 and 6 when the segment A is lit, and the game setting value is 1 and when the segment A is the control target and is not lit. It can be determined that it is any of 4 (see FIG. 40 (A)). That is, when the segment A is turned on, the game setting value 1 which is the most disadvantageous to the player is denied, and there is a possibility that the game setting values 5 and 6 are advantageous to the player. On the contrary, when the segment A is controlled and is not lit, there is a possibility that the game setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, when the segment A is lit, the game setting value 1 is denied, and the possibility of the game setting values 5 and 6 remains. Therefore, it is relatively possible that the game setting value is advantageous for the player. It gets higher.

Segment B may be lit when the game set value is 1, 2, 3 or 4. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is one of 1, 2, 3 and 4 when the segment B is lit, and the game setting value is 5 and when the segment B is the control target and is not lit. It can be determined that it is any of 6 (see FIG. 40 (A)). That is, when the segment B is not lit, it is determined that the game setting value 5 or 6 is advantageous to the player for the player. Therefore, whether or not the segment B is turned on is an extremely important factor in determining whether or not the game setting value is advantageous for the player.

Segment C may be lit when the game set value is 1, 3, 4, 5 or 6. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is one of 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6 when the segment C is lit, and the game setting value is set when the segment C is the control target and is not lit. It can be determined to be 2 (see FIG. 40 (A)). That is, when the segment C is turned on, the game setting value 2 which is relatively disadvantageous to the player is denied, but it is possible that the game setting values 5 and 6 are in a state advantageous to the player. Is left, but the possibility that the game setting value is 1 is also left at the same time. Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether or not the segment C is lit or not alone, which is an advantageous game setting value for the player. In that sense, the segment C is less important, but at the same time as the segment C, other than the segment C When another segment becomes a control target, it is important to judge in combination with the fact whether or not the other segment is turned on. For example, when segment E is lit as the other segment, it can be determined that it is one of the game setting values 2 and 6 as described later. Therefore, when the segment C is lit and the segment E is lit, it is determined that the game setting value 6 is the most advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the segment C is not lit even though it is the control target and the segment E is lit, it is determined that the game setting value 2 is relatively disadvantageous to the player.

Segment D may be lit when the game set value is 2, 3, 5 or 6. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is any of 2, 3, 5 and 6 when the segment D is lit, and the game setting value is 1 and when the segment D is the control target and is not lit. It can be determined that it is any of 4 (see FIG. 40 (A)). That is, when the segment D is turned on, the game setting value 1 which is the most disadvantageous to the player is denied, and the possibility that the game setting values 5 and 6 are advantageous to the player increases, as in the segment A. Therefore, it can be determined that it is highly possible that the segment D is turned on in an advantageous state for the player, and conversely, when the segment D is controlled and is not turned on, the player can see it. It can be judged that there is a high possibility of being in a disadvantageous state.

The segment E can be lit when the game setting value is 2 or 6. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is either 2 or 6 when the segment E is lit, and the game setting values are 1, 3, 4 and when the segment E is the control target and is not lit. It can be determined that it is any of 5 (see FIG. 40 (A)). That is, since there is a possibility that the game setting value is 6 when the segment E is lit, the game setting value 6 is affirmed by another segment at the same time as the segment E, and the game setting value 2 is denied. , It is possible to determine whether or not the game setting value 6 is the most advantageous for the player. For example, when segment B is controlled and not lit, segment C is lit, and segment F is lit, the game setting value 6 is affirmed and the game setting value 2 is denied. Therefore, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the segment E is turned on, so that the game set value 6 is determined.

Segment F may be lit when the game set value is 4, 5 or 6. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is any of 4, 5 and 6 when the segment F is lit, and the game setting values are 1, 2 and when the segment F is the control target and is not lit. It can be determined that it is any of 3 (see FIG. 40 (A)). That is, when the segment F is turned on, it can be determined that the top three game setting values 4, 5 or 6 are advantageous for the player. On the contrary, when the segment F is controlled and is not lit, it can be determined that the lower three game setting values 1, 2 or 3 are disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, since the high or low of the game set value can be determined by whether or not the segment F is controlled and turned on, the player decides whether or not to continue the game on the game machine 10 currently in progress. It will be easier to judge.

The segment G can be lit when the game setting values are 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is any of 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 when the segment G is lit, and the game setting value is set when the segment G is the control target and is not lit. It can be determined to be 1 (see FIG. 40 (A)). That is, it can be determined whether or not the game setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous to the player depending on whether or not the segment G is controlled and turned on. Therefore, when the segment G is controlled and is not lit, it is determined that the game setting value is 1, so that the player is given an opportunity to end the game on the game machine 10 currently in progress. Be done.

As described above, the segments A to G are not the same in importance in estimating the game setting value, but are different in importance. For example, the segments A to G differ in the ease of guessing the game setting value itself and the ease of determining the level of the game setting value independently, and the game setting value in combination with other segments. And the ease of guessing the height is different. Therefore, the ease of estimating the game setting value differs depending on the order in which each segment is controlled. Then, in the present embodiment, the segments A to G are controlled in the order according to the pattern selected from the plurality of control order patterns predetermined for each game set value (see FIG. 40 (B)). As will be described later, the control order pattern includes those in which each segment A to G is controlled in an order in which the game set value is difficult to guess.

The segments A to G to be controlled may be determined by lottery regardless of the control order pattern. In this case, when the number of game balls 99 entered in the special out ball mouth 373 is plural, a lottery is performed according to the number of game balls 99 entered in the special out ball mouth 373, and the lottery is performed. The segments A to G determined by the above are sequentially controlled. Further, when the segments A to G to be controlled are determined by lottery, the selection rates of the segments A to G may be made uniform, but the selection rate of at least one segment may be different from the selection rate of the other segments. May be good. For example, it is conceivable to increase the selection rate of the segment in which it is difficult to estimate the game setting value, and decrease the selection rate of the segment in which the game setting value can be easily estimated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game set value from being easily estimated when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied is small.

Further, whether or not each of the segments A to G is controlled by the 7-segment display unit 39 may or may not be clearly indicated to the player. When it is clearly stated that each of the segments A to G is the control target, it is easier to estimate the game set value than when it is not clearly stated. Then, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, it is not clearly stated that each segment A to G is a control target, and a method is adopted in which it is difficult to estimate the game set value. When clearly indicating to the player that each of the segments A to G is the control target, for example, by lighting the control target segment, the player is clearly shown that the segment is the control target, and the control target is controlled. It is conceivable to clearly indicate to the player that the segment is the control target by lighting the segment in a color different from that in the case of lighting the segment.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 for storing the ball game balls supplied from the island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 for paying out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of balls to be paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the electric power supplied from the island facility (not shown) to which the game machine 10 is connected into a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the electric power to the control device and the driving means provided in the game machine 10.

[System configuration of game machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 12, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes the main control of the game in the game machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. Further, the MPU 41 has a built-in ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, the special out ball sensor 384, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 has or does not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the entry sensors 313a to 317a. To judge. Further, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (the number of fired balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 35. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power supply control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 gives the voice lamp control device 5 a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a jackpot game end command, and a special out ball. Output commands such as detection command and game setting value change command.

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. 26 described later based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described later when the symbol variation display by the main display unit 37 is started. To. The fluctuation pattern command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of only the fluctuation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

The first hold command and the second hold command are the lottery results, fluctuation patterns, and fluctuation patterns in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of holds N or the number of holds M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described later when the hold number N or the hold number M increases (FIG. 22 described later). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process.

The shift command indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 or the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 when the hold number N or the hold number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the pass / fail information has been shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process of FIG. 23, which will be described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, that is, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, and when the jackpot game state shifts, FIG. It is set in the game state transition process in the main process of. Further, since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game will start, the voice lamp control device 5 starts the jackpot game by receiving the jackpot game start command. Not only that, but also the opening can be grasped. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command so that the voice lamp control device 5 knows that the opening is started by the opening start command.

The round game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the round number information indicating the start of each round game and the number of rounds of the round game in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game. , Set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later. In the voice lamp control device 5, it can be grasped that the opening is ended and the open / close execution mode is started by the round game start command, but the opening end command is set at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command. Alternatively, the open / close execution mode start command may be set when the open / close execution mode starts. Further, apart from the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5.

The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is finished, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later.

The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the croon device 37, and is a command shown in FIG. It is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process. The voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a predetermined period based on the special out ball detection command, and the number of segments (number of steps) to be controlled to turn on or off on the 7-segment display unit 39. Is determined.

The game setting value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is a command in step S1710 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. Is set in.

Although commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, their description will be omitted.

Further, the main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillating circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillating circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 is divided into main timers, which will be described later, each time a rising edge (or falling edge) of the clock signal occurs. It is assumed that the interrupt process is started and executed. The oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply the operation clock of the control main body in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 and the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the game machine 10 to perform a big hit lottery or the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 executes the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time by using the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the electric service hold area 412c of the RAM 412.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the loss type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. Is done. Further, the lottery counter 412a is set to the normal hit random number counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 is in the electric service open state, and the initial value setting of the normal hit random number counter C4. The normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for is included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they are simply abbreviated as counters.

Then, the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41 and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when the jackpot lottery and the variable display time are set.

The hold storage area 412b includes a first hold storage area REA, a second hold storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first hold storage area REA includes a first hold area REA1, a second hold area REA2, a third hold area REA3, a fourth hold area REA4, and a hold number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of the variable game in which the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA and the 7-segment display 372 displays the variable display and the stop display is referred to as the first special symbol game. is there. The second hold storage area REB includes a first hold area REB1, a second hold area REB2, a third hold area REB3, a fourth hold area REB4, and a hold number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of the variable game in which the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the 7-segment display 373 displays the variable display and the stop display is referred to as the second special symbol game. is there.

Then, when the game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as the winning / failing information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as the winning / failing information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB. The pass / fail information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 41 that functions as the determination means of the present invention by executing the process according to the control program. The lottery counters 412a (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, variable type counter CS1, etc.) are individually corresponding to the first hold storage area REA and the second hold storage area REB. It may be provided in.

As described above, in the game machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area of the first hold storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the REA4 and the second hold storage area REB.

Therefore, 19 games are played based on the hit / fail information stored in the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 and the second hold storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to determine in advance the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the winning / failing information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. It is stored in the area where it is. In the hold number storage area NAA, the number of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 in which the hit / fail information is stored is stored as the hold number N.

Further, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the winning / failing information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. Stored in the area. In the hold number storage area NAB, the number of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 in which the hit / fail information is stored is stored as the hold number M.

That is, in the game machine 10, the first winning opening 314 has a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4. It is possible to hold up to four winning / failing information as a winning history for the second winning opening 315.

In addition, it is considered as another embodiment that the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 are provided with a holding area having a maximum number of holdings of eight, and even in this case, a maximum of eight can be held in total. It is possible to withhold the winning / failing information as the winning history. The storage process of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA or the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB when the symbol change display on the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. It is a storage area used for moving the pass / fail information stored in. Specifically, the pass / fail information of the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the pass / fail information does not exist in the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB. When the hold number storage area NAB is 0, the pass / fail information of the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

The difference between the number of holds M stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the number of holds N stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In the case of, it is considered as another embodiment that the value of the holding area having the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Further, it is also considered as another embodiment that the pass / fail information of the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA and the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a big hit lottery or the like based on the numerical information stored as the hit / miss information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the pass / fail information stored in the second hold area REA2 shifts to the first hold area REA1 and the third The pass / fail information stored in the hold area REA3 shifts to the second hold area REA2, and the pass / fail information stored in the fourth hold area REA4 shifts to the third hold area REA3.

Similarly, when the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the hit / fail information stored in the second hold area REB2 shifts to the first hold area REB1 and is held third. The pass / fail information stored in the area REB3 shifts to the second hold area REB2, and the pass / fail information stored in the fourth hold area REB4 shifts to the third hold area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 637, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

Two types of random number values for winning the jackpot are set according to the winning / failing table stored in the winning / failing table storage area in the ROM 411, corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode which is the probability variation game state. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode hit / fail table corresponding to a low-probability mode, and FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode hit / miss table corresponding to a high-probability mode.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 14 (A) and 14 (B), the probability that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit (big hit probability) is set as the game setting value as the low probability mode hit / miss table and the high probability mode hit / miss table, respectively. A plurality of different pass / fail tables are provided depending on the situation. The low-probability mode pass / fail table and the high-probability mode pass / fail table each include six win / fail tables corresponding to the six-stage game setting values 1 to 6. In the order of game set value 6, game set value 5, game set value 3, game set value 2, and game set value 1, the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot is high, which is advantageous to the player.

In the game setting value 1, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode win / fail table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 821 (0 to 820). That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/79. 9 (820/65536).

In the game setting value 2, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode win / fail table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 845 (0 to 844). That is, in the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/77, which is about 4 times that in the low probability mode. 6 (845/65536).

In the game setting value 3, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 218 (0 to 217) for the low probability mode win / fail table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 869 (0 to 868). That is, at the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/75, which is about 4 times that in the low probability mode. 4 (869/65536).

In the game setting value 4, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 893 (0 to 892). That is, at the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/73, which is about 4 times that in the low probability mode. 4 (893/65536).

In the game setting value 5, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 917 (0 to 916). That is, at the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

In the game setting value 6, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 236 (0 to 235) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 941 (0 to 940). That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/69. 6 (941/65536).

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number values for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be missed.

Here, in the low-probability mode win / fail table and the high-probability mode win / fail table, the random numbers that are the big hits in the big hit lottery between the same game setting values are common, but it is also considered that the random numbers that are the big hits are not common. Be done. Further, the random numbers that win the jackpot may not be continuous values but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

Further, six low-probability mode hit / miss tables and six high-probability mode hit / miss tables are provided according to the game setting values of six stages, but at least one win / miss table for each mode is sufficient. That is, the game setting value is not limited to 6 stages. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low-probability mode hit / miss tables corresponding to a plurality of stages of game setting values, while providing one high-probability mode hit / miss table. That is, it is conceivable that a plurality of stages of game setting values are provided for the low probability mode, and a stepwise game setting value is not provided for the high probability mode, and the jackpot probability is made uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode may be made uniform, and a plurality of stages of game setting values may be provided for the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. In the game machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpots, the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area in the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 14C is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 14C, when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 314, the number of random numbers that becomes the 5R probability variation jackpot is 10 of 0 to 9. The number of random numbers that are 16R probability variation jackpots is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are 5R normal jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by winning the second winning opening 315, the number of random numbers that become the 5R probability variation jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and the 16R probability variation jackpot. The number of fourth random numbers is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers to be a 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, the game machine 10 is a so-called loop probability change machine in which the probability of the probability change jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Further, in the game machine 10, the probability of 16R probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that in the first special symbol game. That is, in the probabilistic game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), the jackpot is compared with the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode). When the lottery result in the lottery is a big hit, the expected value of the game ball is set high.

In this embodiment, individual swings are made for each of the first winning opening 314, which triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning, and the second winning opening 315, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning. A minute table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on which of the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 the game ball wins, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol It is also possible that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same as that of the game. Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to the loop probabilistic machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a type-two type mixer, or the like.

Then, in the MPU 41, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", and "5R normal" based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Determine whether it is a "big hit" or a "missing".

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open / close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, after the jackpot game is completed, the player shifts to a probability variation game state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high and the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high. Then, in the present embodiment, the probability variation game state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game is completed, the player shifts to a time-saving game state in which the jackpot winning probability is low and the electric accessory 315b is open in a high frequency support mode. Then, in the present embodiment, the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) notifies the player of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery of a predetermined number of preset times such as 50 times and 100 times. It ends when the player decides that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit before the lapse of the specified number of times.

By the way, when the game machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability change machine, a preset specified number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) of big hits is made after the end of the big hit game at the time of the probability change big hit. When the lottery is executed in the probabilistic game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the lottery result in the big hit lottery does not become a big hit by the lapse of the specified number of times, the normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency) (Support mode) is entered, and the high-frequency support mode ends. Further, in the variable game, it is considered as another embodiment to perform a fall lottery from the probabilistic game state to the time-saving game state or the normal game state. If the lottery result in the big hit lottery is out of order, the game state is not changed to the big hit game state or the time saving game state. In the present embodiment, a case where the game machine 10 has three types of jackpots, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, 2 round probability variation jackpot, 2 It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round regular jackpot and 16R regular jackpot.

Further, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

In the game machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order. Specifically, due to the deviation type table stored in the deviation type table storage area in the ROM 411, the front / rear deviation reach, in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the same reach occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of outliers, that is, the reach other than the front-back deviation in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol, and the complete deviation in which reach does not occur, is set.

Here, FIG. 14 (D) is a diagram showing an example of an outlier type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (D), the value of the random number that is out of front and back is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that is reach other than front and back is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that is completely out of line is 39. ~ 238. The MPU 41 determines that reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the variable game in which the 5R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot, or the 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, the variable game that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the reach indicates a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbols indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to occur between the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbol. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the effective line on the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. Further, while the reach of the symbol display unit 341 is in a fluctuating state, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or an operation by the player on the operation button 20 is reflected in the effect. Person participation type operation effect processing and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, reduced or enlarged, and displayed during the execution of these effect processing.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time according to the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 412c. For example, it is considered that the winning is won when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 199, and the loss is considered when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 200 to 250.

The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. By determining the variation pattern type in this way, the voice lamp control device 5 has a rough variation game effect such as high-speed variation effect (basic effect, non-reach effect), normal reach effect, super reach effect, and special reach effect. The type is determined according to the fluctuation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the preset fluctuation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 specifies the type of fluctuation pattern with reference to the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, or the deviation fluctuation table stored in advance in the fluctuation table storage area of ROM 411. In addition, these fluctuation tables may be provided individually for each low-probability mode and high-probability mode. Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 15 (A), 15 (B), and 15 (C) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a probabilistic jackpot fluctuation table, and a deviation fluctuation table. As shown in FIGS. 15 (A), 15 (B) and 15 (C), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table and the deviation fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern is preliminarily set according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is associated. Then, the MPU 41 is a normal jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", a probability variation jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot", and a lottery. If the result is "off", refer to the out-of-variation table and specify the type of fluctuation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” are set according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is selected. When the variation pattern "01" is selected here, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach effect pattern having a variation display time of 30 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 determines the normal reach effect pattern. Is executed. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect. When the variation pattern "02" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern in which the variation display time is 60 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 determines the super reach effect. The pattern is executed. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect. Further, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern having the longest variation display time of 90s as the variation type (effect pattern), and the symbol display unit 341 determines the special reach effect pattern. The production pattern is executed. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 15C, in the deviation variation table, the variation type counter CS1 is used for each stop type (reach before and after deviation, reach other than front and rear deviation, complete deviation) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. The correspondence between and the fluctuation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of disconnection is front / rear deviation reach or non-front / rear deviation reach, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. .. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is completely deviated, either the fluctuation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the variation display time is 7 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. A non-reach effect pattern is executed in unit 341. When the variation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the variation display time is 10 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. A non-reach effect pattern is executed in unit 341.

For example, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "04", the variation display of the deviation pattern is stopped at the deviation pattern without accompanying the advance notice effect of displaying characters, messages, etc. Is executed. Further, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", the variation display of the deviation pattern that stops at the deviation pattern is displayed with a notice effect of displaying a character, a message, or the like. Will be executed. Further, in the case of the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", a player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a notice effect.

The type of fluctuation pattern is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 15 (A), 15 (B) and 15 (C). Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

For example, in the game machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "01", and any of them is selected. The normal reach production is executed.

Similarly, in the game machine 10, a plurality of types of super reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super reach effects executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "02", and a selection is made from among them. One of the super reach effects that have been made is performed. The super reach production is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach production, and the probability (expectation) that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is higher than the normal reach production, and the big hit is won more than the special reach production. It is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) is low.

Further, in the game machine 10, as a special reach effect executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "03", a plurality of types of special reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and a selection is made from among them. One of the special reach effects that have been made is performed. The special reach effect is a reach effect having a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is an effect developed from, for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach effect is executed when it is suggested to the player that the probability (expectation degree) of winning a big hit is higher than that of the normal reach effect or the special reach effect.

The effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern includes an operation effect in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single operation effect in which the single operation is reflected in the effect, and an operation button 20 by the player. A player-participation-type operation effect such as a continuous hit operation effect in which the continuous hit operation is reflected in the effect and a long press operation effect in which the long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 41 issues a fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Input to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU41 has a fluctuation pattern command "A" in front of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Output any one of "A01" to "A03". Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU41 is a variation pattern command "B01" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot is added before the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". ~ Outputs any of "B03". Further, the MPU 41 is a variation pattern command "C01" in which, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is added before the variation patterns "01" to "03". ~ Outputs any of "C03". Further, in the MPU 41, when the lottery result is "off", the fluctuation pattern commands "D01" to "D05" in which "D" indicating that the lottery is out are added before the fluctuation patterns "01" to "05". Output any of. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 is based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in are determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, reproduces the voice from the speaker 26 according to the fluctuation display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. Or turn it off.

As described above, in the game machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process of determining the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation table for the fluctuation display in the symbol display unit 341. Will be executed. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the game machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the jackpot lottery can be stably executed by the MPU 41. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes as the variation mode.

Here, FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the game machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information related to game history, ball ejection performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, in the game information storage area 412d, as game information, "number of out balls", "number of general winning opening payout balls", "first winning opening payout number", "second winning opening payout number" , "Variable winning slot payout number", "Game setting value", "Base information", "Continuous character ratio information", "Character ratio information", "Cumulative jackpot lottery count", "Unit jackpot lottery count" , "Number of jackpots", and "Number of consecutive misses" are stored. Of these game information, "game setting value", "base information", "continuous bonus ratio information", "feature ratio information", and "unit jackpot lottery count" are game information (performance information) related to ball ejection performance. ) Corresponds.

The “number of out balls” is an integrated value of the number of game balls fired on the game board 31 in the normal game state (a state in which the low probability mode is not the high frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a value obtained by counting the out balls detected by the out ball sensor 35 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20, which will be described later.

The "general winning opening payout number" is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning a prize in the general winning opening 313 in the normal game state (a state in which the low probability mode is not the high frequency support mode). This "number of balls to be paid out from the general winning opening" is set to the winning ball command setting in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later, when the winning ball sensor 313a detects the winning of the general winning opening 313 in the normal gaming state. When setting the prize ball command for the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize in the general prize opening 313 in the process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out by this prize. ..

The "number of balls paid out in the first winning opening" is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning a prize in the first winning opening 314 in the normal game state (a state in which the low probability mode is not the high frequency support mode). .. This "number of balls paid out from the first winning opening" is the winning ball in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later, when the winning sensor 314a detects the winning of the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. A value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out from this prize when setting the prize ball command for the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize to the first prize opening 314 in the command setting process. Update to.

The "number of balls paid out from the second winning opening" is the total value of the game balls paid out for winning the second winning opening 315 in the time-saving game state (the state of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode). .. This "number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening" is the winning ball in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later, when a winning ball to the second winning opening 315 is detected by the ball entry sensor 315a in the time-saving game state. A value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out from this prize when setting a prize ball command for the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize to the second prize opening 315 in the command setting process. Update to.

The "variable winning slot payout number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning a prize in the variable winning slot 316 in a jackpot game state (a state in which the high probability mode is in the high frequency support mode). This "variable winning slot payout number" is set in the prize ball command setting in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later, when a winning ball is detected in the variable winning slot 316 by the ball entry sensor 316a in the jackpot game state. When setting a prize ball command for the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning of the variable winning opening 316 in the process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out by this winning. ..

The "number of out balls", "number of general winning lots paid out", "number of first winning lots paid out", "number of second winning lots paid out" and "number of variable winning lots paid out" are shown in the figures below. In the specific performance information update process of 28, when the "number of out balls" reaches 60,000 balls (step S1806: Yes), it is cleared to 0 balls (step S1810).

The "game set value" is for selecting a low-probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 14 (A)) and a high-probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 14 (B)) used in the jackpot lottery (win / fail determination). .. In other words, the "game setting value" defines the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a four-stage game setting value (four types of low-probability mode hit / miss tables with different jackpot probabilities (see FIG. 14 (A)) and a high-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 14 (B)). ) Is prepared. The "game setting value" is updated in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 27, which will be described later.

The "base information" is information about the "base" which is the refund rate (ball output rate) in the normal game state (the state of the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode), and this "base" is the normal game state. This is the ratio of the total number of balls to be paid out to the "number of out-balls" to the "number of balls to be paid out from the general winning lot" and the "number of balls to be paid out from the first winning lot". When the "base" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "base" = 100 x ("general winning lot payout number" + "first winning lot payout number") / "out number of balls". "Base information" includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later (steps S1807 and S1808). Specifically, the "base" when the latest number of out balls reaches 60,000 is the previous 60,000 base B1, and the "base" when the previous number of out balls reaches 60,000 is It is saved as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412 as the 60,000 ball base B2 two times before. Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, the current base BL is calculated as the current base BL (step S1803), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes the "current base BL", the "previous 60,000 ball base B1", and the "previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the history of the past two 60,000 ball bases. However, the 60,000-ball base for the past three times or more may be left as a history. Further, as the "base information", the cumulative base from the time when the game machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present may be included.

"Continuous character ratio information" is the total number of balls to be paid out by winning all the winning openings (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315 and variable winning opening 316) for which prize balls are paid out. This is information on the "continuous bonus ratio", which is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable winning lots. When the "continuous bonus ratio" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "continuous bonus ratio" = 100 x "variable winning lot payout number" / "total payout number". The "continuous accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "continuous bonus ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous bonus ratio from the time the game machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. The "continuous bonus ratio information" is for a certain period (for example, a certain number of big hits (for example, 100 times), and a period until a certain number of big hit lottery (for example, 1000 times) is executed in a normal gaming state. , The ratio of continuous bonuses to a certain number of out balls (for example, the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)) may be used. Of course, the "continuous bonus ratio information" may include both the cumulative continuous bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio over a certain number of periods.

"Character ratio information" is the total number of balls to be paid out by winning all the winning openings (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315 and variable winning opening 316) for which prize balls are paid out. This is information on the "feature ratio", which is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out to the number of balls paid out in the second prize opening and the number of balls paid out in the variable winning lot. When the "feature ratio" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "feature ratio" = 100 x ("second winning lot payout number" + "variable winning lot payout number") / "total payout number". The “accessory ratio information” is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "character ratio information" is stored as the cumulative character ratio from the time the game machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. The "feature ratio information" is for a certain period (for example, a certain number of big hits (for example, 100 times), or a period until a certain number of big hit lottery (for example, 1000 times) is executed in a normal game state. It may be a bonus ratio to a certain number of out balls (for example, a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "continuous bonus ratio information" may include both the cumulative bonus ratio and the bonus ratio over a certain number of periods.

The "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is set in the normal game state (low probability mode, not high frequency support mode) from the start of the game machine 10 before the opening of the game hall to the present. This is the number of times the jackpot lottery was held. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is also the cumulative fluctuation display count in which the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is executed when the first winning opening 314 is won in the normal gaming state. is there. The “cumulative jackpot lottery number” is added by 1 each time the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later. Further, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power of the game machine 10.

"Number of unit jackpot lottery" is a jackpot lottery triggered by winning a certain number of negative difference balls in the normal game state (low probability mode and not high frequency support mode) to the first winning opening 314. It is the number of times received (the number of times that the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is executed). In the present embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "general winning opening payout number" and the "first winning opening payout number" from the "out ball number". In other words, the "unit jackpot lottery count" is the number of symbol fluctuation displays (the number of jackpot lottery received) of the 7-segment display 372, which is an average of 1000 yen, when 250 balls are rented for 1000 yen at the game hall. is there. The "unit jackpot lottery number" may be the number of times a jackpot lottery is received per a certain number of "out balls" in the normal gaming state. The “unit jackpot lottery number” is updated in step S1805 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot lottery" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot lottery from the time the game machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. The "unit jackpot lottery number" is for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), or until a certain number of jackpot lottery (for example, 1000 times) is executed in a normal gaming state. It may be for the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, as the "number of unit jackpot lottery", both the cumulative number of unit jackpot lottery and the number of unit jackpot lottery in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information.

The "number of jackpots" is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery conducted from the start of the game machine 10 to the present before the opening of the game hall is a jackpot. The “number of big hits” is added by 1 each time the game state is changed to the big hit game state in the game state transition process executed in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later. Further, the "big hit count" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power of the game machine 10.

The "number of consecutive misses" is the number of times that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are consecutively missed in the normal game state (the state of the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode), and the lottery result is the jackpot. In some cases, it is cleared 0 times. The "number of consecutive deviations" is the result of the hit / fail determination based on the low probability mode hit / miss table in step S1603 when the symbol change display of the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the change start process of FIG. 26 described later. If it is off, it is added by 1 and if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, it is cleared to 0 times. In the present embodiment, the "number of continuous disconnections" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power of the game machine 10. Of course, the "number of consecutive disconnections" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d by turning off the main power of the game machine 10.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "game setting value" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. is there. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a game setting value display unit 45, a setting value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays "base information" in the game machine 10, and is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality of (four in this embodiment) 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-segment display. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. It may be provided in. It is also conceivable to display "base information" by using the two 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37.

The 7-segment display 431 to 434 can display the numbers "0" to "9" and the alphabets "A" to "F". In the 7-segment display 431 to 434, when displaying the alphabet "B", a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "8" and "8." is displayed, and the alphabet "D" is displayed. When displaying, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "0" and "0." is displayed. Further, when displaying any of the alphabets "A" to "F", it is conceivable to light the dots to clearly indicate that the alphabet is an alphabet.

In the performance display monitor 43, the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are identification segments in which the "base type" is displayed by an abbreviation, and the right two 7 segments. The display 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviations "BL" of the current base BL are "8." and "L" in the two left 7-segment displays 431 and 432 which are the identification segments. Is displayed as, and the base value "31" is displayed as "3" and "1" on the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434 which are ratio segments. That is, on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, "8.", "L", "3", and "1" are displayed in order from the left.

The performance display switch 44 collectively switches the power on / off of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) by a pressing operation, and is in a position where it is easy to operate when the inner frame 12 is expanded. It is provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the operation of turning on the power of the performance display switch 44 is performed, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, and the base information can be displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when the power is turned off for the performance display switch 44, the energization of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. .. The performance display switch 44 may be provided in addition to the main control device 4.

Here, FIG. 18A is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are in the off state, so that the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 18 (B) to 18 (D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, as "base information", the current base BL → the previous 60,000 unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off. The ball base B1 → 60,000 ball base B2 before the previous time → the current base BL are looped in this order, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. In the example shown in FIG. 18B, the current base BL is 28%, and in the example shown in FIG. 18C, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and FIG. 18D shows. In the example shown in, it is shown that the 60,000 ball base B2 is 32% two times before. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

The program required to display "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, for example, the current base BL, the program that calculates the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and the current base on the performance display monitor 43. A program for displaying BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 in order at regular time intervals is stored in a ROM 47 provided separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4. As a result, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has a sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. Further, a program necessary for displaying "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

Further, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of the "base information" or in addition to the "base information", it is stored in the game information storage area 412d such as "continuous character ratio information" and "character ratio information". Other performance information may be displayed.

Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by other types of displays such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display.

Returning to the description of FIG. 17, the game setting value display unit 45 selects the low-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 14 (A)) and the high-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 14 (B)) referred to in the jackpot lottery. It displays the above-mentioned game setting value for the purpose, and is composed of a 7-segment display. The game setting value display unit 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, but may be configured by other types of displays such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display, and uses the performance display monitor 43. The game setting value may be displayed.

The setting value changing operation unit 46 switches the power supply of the 7-segment display on and off by a pressing operation, and makes it possible to change the game setting value by rotating the 7-segment display when the power is on. The set value changing operation unit 46 has, for example, a function as a contact type switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, and a function as a rotary switch that switches contacts by a rotation operation (rotation of a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a display example on the game setting value display unit 45 of the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 18A, when the game setting value display unit 45 is off and the setting value changing operation unit 46 is pressed, the 7-segment display is energized to generate the game setting value. A number is displayed on the display unit 45. The numbers displayed at this time are the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicate the current game setting values. In the illustrated example, the game set value is "1". On the other hand, when the game setting value display unit 45 is in the lit state and a pressing operation is performed on the setting value change operation unit 46, the 7-segment display is cut off and the game setting value display unit 45 is turned off. It becomes a state.

As shown in FIG. 18B, when the game setting value display unit 45 is lit and the setting value changing operation unit 46 is rotated, the numbers displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 change. Will be done. In the illustrated example, the game setting value display unit 45 is rotated clockwise to increase the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45, and the game setting value display unit 45 is rotated counterclockwise to display the game setting value. The number displayed in unit 45 becomes smaller. When the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the game setting value display unit 45, the changed number is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as the game setting value. To. Therefore, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed with the number corresponding to the target game setting value displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 and the power of the 7-segment display is turned off, the power is turned on. The number displayed immediately before being turned off is determined as the game setting value. As a result, the MPU 41 has a low-probability mode pass / fail table (see FIG. 14 (A)) or a high-probability mode pass / fail table (FIG. 14 (B)) that is selected according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. ) Can be used as a jackpot lottery.

The method of changing the game setting value is not limited to the method of turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 after rotating the setting value changing operation unit 46. For example, a method of determining a game set value by rotating the set value changing operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), or by repeatedly hitting or holding down the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). A method of turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 after changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45, or by inserting the key into the keyhole provided in the main control device 4 or the like and rotating the key. A method of removing the key after changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 may be used.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 12, the sub control unit 332 includes a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and a symbol variation display and a symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331. Execute the effect display.

[Voice lamp control device 5]
The voice lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 has a built-in ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used in the variable game effect, the jackpot game effect, and the lamp blinking pattern. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The voice lamp control device 5 commands the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4 by executing the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51. (Control signal) is input to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when executing the variable game effect and the jackpot game effect described later.

The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 outputs a display fluctuation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. Another embodiment is also conceivable in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, another embodiment is also conceivable in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

Further, a speaker 26 and an illumination unit 27 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 outputs the voice from the speaker 26 based on the command input from the main control device 4, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the stopper unit 383 of the game ball retention unit 38. It is possible to control the vertical movement of the 7-segment display unit 39 and the like. By controlling the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 by the MPU 51, the game ball (special out) entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the croon device 37 in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38. A state in which the ball) is retained and a state in which the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 is discharged via the discharge lane 382 are selected. Further, by controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 by the MPU 51, the number of segments corresponding to the number of special out balls accumulated in the game ball retention unit 38 is individually turned on or off. Further, an operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the sound is output from the image game effect and the speaker 26 executed by the symbol display unit 341. It is also possible to control the sound output effect, the lamp effect depending on the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes a predetermined arithmetic process based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4.

Specifically, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 has a variation pattern (a combination of stop symbols of the main symbol (see FIG. 36 (A)), a variation display time, and a variation type (FIG. 36) based on the variation pattern command. (See (A)))) and the effect pattern type (see FIGS. 37 (A) to 37 (C)) are determined, and a display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (FIG. 35). (See step S2105 in the command determination process of the above), the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, when the variation pattern command indicates an deviation, the symbol display unit 341 displays a combination of main symbols corresponding to the deviation. Further, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 executes a ball ejection performance suggestion image display process for displaying the ball ejection performance suggestion image suggesting the ball ejection performance on the sub image display unit 38.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Bidirectional communication may be possible between the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built-in. Further, the display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of images such as a variable symbol such as a main symbol used in the symbol variable display of the symbol display unit 341, a preview effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, and a missed effect image. ing. The image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 includes a still image and a moving image. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type and display timing of the image to be used, but also the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and the effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 has a built-in ROM 711 and RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out the game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and has a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not the game ball is paid out. It is provided with a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error such as a ball clogging of the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball rental device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the game machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of the ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the game machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the set amount and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to generate a predetermined number of game balls. It will be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated to launch the game ball stored in the upper plate 23 on the launch rail 321. Supply on. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22, and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. And fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON / OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the game machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 increases the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the launch handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the launch handle 22 is fixed in a rotationally operated state, and the game is prevented in a situation where the player is not touching the launch handle 22. Further, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with his thumb or the like while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, and the like, a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the game machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the game machine 10 is returned to the initial state. The game machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means for being charged by the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information of the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Further, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply is cut off, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like receive the power failure signal from the power control device 9, the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like interrupt the ongoing control and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main control unit 4]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 33. Specifically, in the game machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on, a start-up process, a main process executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a power failure. Execute NMI interrupt processing and so on. In this embodiment, the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like will be omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. Hereinafter, the main timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining a detection state of a sensor or the like connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, the special out ball sensor 384, and the like are determined. At this time, when the entry of the game ball into any of the entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as the winning detection information. Further, when the out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 35, the MPU 41 updates the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d by adding 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. To do. Further, the MPU 41 sets a special out-ball detection command when a special out-ball is detected by the special out-ball sensor 384, and stores the special out-ball detection command in the RAM 412. The number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d is cleared to 0 when the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is calculated by reaching 60,000 balls (step S1810 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28). reference).

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 added 1 to each of the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and the counter values reached the maximum value. If so, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes the start winning process (step S1004) accompanying the winning of the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, and executes the firing control process (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the launch control process, the game ball is on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to enable the firing of. Further, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is effective.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 draws a lottery for whether or not to set the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 to the electric service open state based on the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 412c. Executes through-gate processing. Specifically, in the through-gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the high-frequency support mode based on the high-frequency support mode flag. Then, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 29 when it is not in the high frequency support mode, and disengages when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. Judge that. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and disengages when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. Judge that. Then, when the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol has been won in the through gate processing, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to win a prize in the second winning opening 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 in which the electric accessory 315b is arranged side by side.

[Starting prize processing]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to FIG. 21.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there has been a prize for the first winning opening 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the first winning opening 314 has won a prize (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and if it determines that the first winning opening 314 has not been won (step S1101: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holds N is the maximum number of holds (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, if the hold number N is not the maximum hold number (step S1102: No), 1 is added to the hold number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and a variable type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 of FIG. 23). And S1312), and the counter value is stored in the first free hold area of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first hold storage area REA of the hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 displays the content of the hit / fail information before the hit / miss information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes the target of determining the hit / miss of the jackpot in the fluctuation start processing (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later. Confirmation is performed, and the first hold command setting process for setting the first hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there has been a prize for the second winning opening 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the second winning opening 315 has won a prize (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and if it determines that the second winning opening 315 has not won a prize (step S1106: No). ), The start winning process is completed, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holds M is the maximum number of holds (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, if the hold number M is not the maximum hold number (step S1107: No), 1 is added to the hold number M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and a variable type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 of FIG. 23). And S1312), and the counter value is stored in the first free hold area of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second hold storage area REB of the hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 receives the hit / fail information before the hit / miss information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 becomes a target for determining the hit / miss of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later. The contents are confirmed, and the second hold command setting process for setting the second hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 22, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second hold command setting process, in the first hold command setting process of FIG. 22, if the "first hold command" is read as the "second hold command" and the "hold number N" is read as the "hold number M". Good.

[1st hold command setting process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. 21. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type (big hit type or deviation) of the first hold command, the fluctuation pattern, and the number of holds N. .. Hereinafter, the first hold command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the hold number N from the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412 (step). S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the high probability mode, and if it is in the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process shifts to step S1203, and if it is not in the high probability mode (step S1202). : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 is set to turn on whether or not it is in the high probability mode at the time of transition to the high probability mode in the game state transition process (step S1306 in FIG. 23) in the main process described later, and the jackpot game from the high probability mode. Judgment is based on the high probability mode flag that is set to off when transitioning to another gaming state such as a state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads out the high-probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 14B) saved according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later, and the high-probability mode is read. Based on the winning / failing table, the winning / failing determination of whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out the low probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 14A) saved according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change process of FIG. Based on the probability mode winning / failing table, the winning / failing determination of whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the hit / fail determination is executed based on the high-probability mode hit / miss table or the low-probability mode hit / miss table saved according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. However, in step S1203 or S1204, after reading the game setting value saved in step S1710 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later, the high probability mode hit / miss table or the low probability according to the game setting value is read. The pass / fail judgment may be performed by selecting the mode pass / fail table one by one.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process shifts to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read from is not the value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the winning / failing information is stored in the third holding area REA3 in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 21, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type included in the winning / failing information stored in the third holding area REA3. The counter value of the counter CS1 is read out. Of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4, the hold area in which the hit / fail information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 21 is the value of the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA. It can be judged by.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 and the hold number N in the first hold command. As described above, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command is the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 the first hold command corresponds to the pass / fail information stored.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the variable type counter CS1 and the hold number N in the first hold command (step S1209).

The first hold command set to be turned on in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed in the main process step S1301 of FIG. 23 described later, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. It is erased after being transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with the command of. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is only an example, and if the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command, it is not limited to the content described here. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main control unit 4]
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described. In the main process, the main control process for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game is executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1309 are executed as periodic processes of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update process of steps S131 to S1312 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1301 to S1309 to the next cycle. To.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transfers output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20 or the previous main process to a control device such as a sub control unit 332 or a peripheral control unit 140. Executes external output processing to be sent to. For example, in RAM412, commands such as a variable pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a game setting value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery count update command are If it is set, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, when the prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variable type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the variable type counter CS1 and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, or the like, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the game information of the RAM 412 when a prize is generated in the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314 in the normal game state (a state in which the low probability mode is not the high frequency support mode). The number of general winning lots paid out or the number of first winning lots paid out stored in the area 412d is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payouts due to the current winning. In addition, the MPU 41 is placed in the second winning opening 315 in a time-saving game state (a state in which the low probability mode is in the high frequency support mode) or a probability variation game state (a state in which the high probability mode is in the high frequency support mode). When a winning is generated, the number of balls paid out from the second winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out by the current winning. Further, in the jackpot game state, when a winning is generated in the variable winning opening 316, the MPU 41 sets the number of variable winning opening payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as the number of payout balls due to this winning. Is updated to the added value.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. In the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and the variable pattern command required for the symbol variable display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. Will be done. At this time, the MPU 41 has a jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and a variation updated in steps S1302 and S1312 of this process. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, the control process for the jackpot game including the opening, opening / closing execution mode, and ending is executed. In the open / close execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 319 for the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, and as a result, the result of the big hit lottery that triggered the transition to the big hit game (big hit type). ) Is executed as many times as necessary. For example, the MPU 41 executes a round game 5 times when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R probability variation jackpot, and executes a round game 16 times when the jackpot type is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, in the jackpot game control process, the round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when each round game is started in the open / close execution mode, and the ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when the ending is started.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 26 described later. In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 sets the game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot game state in which the open / close execution mode is executed, the probability variation game state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the high. It shifts to the time-saving game state which is the frequency support mode, and the normal game state which is not the high-frequency support mode in the low probability mode.

For example, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the big hit game state after the end of the variable game that notifies the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Further, when the jackpot game is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variation game state after the end of the jackpot game, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot. In some cases, the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when the notification of the lottery result for the specified number of jackpot lottery is completed in the time-saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state after the end of the variable game.

Further, when the transition of the gaming state is shifted, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the gaming state before the transition to off, and sets the flag for the gaming state after the transition to on. For example, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game flag off and the high probability mode flag on when there is a transition of the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, when the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic game state to the jackpot game state, the high probability mode flag is set to off, while the jackpot game flag is set to on.

Further, when shifting the game state to the big hit game state, the MPU 41 sets the big hit game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "big hit number" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes the game setting value change process. In this game setting value changing process, a process of displaying or hiding the game setting value or controlling the change of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d is executed according to the operation of the setting value changing operation unit 46. To. The details of the game setting value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed in the main process, but the start-up process is started when the power is turned on, or between the start-up process and the launch of the game ball. It may be executed in a limited manner. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the game setting value cannot be changed until the next power is turned on, so that the game setting value is changed during the business hours of the game hall. Can be prevented.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes the specific performance information update process in the game information. In the present embodiment, the base information, the number of unit jackpot lottery, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio are updated as the specific performance information. The details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. The details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the process shifts to step S1301 and executes each process after S1301 described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time until it is reached, step S1310, step S1311, and step S1312 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes).

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the variable type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. 23. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game machine 10 is in the jackpot game, and if it is in the jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is performed. If it is finished and the jackpot game is not in progress (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not the jackpot game is executed is set to on when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23, and turns off when the jackpot game state shifts to another game state. Judgment is made based on the jackpot game flag set in.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed, and if the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process is shifted to step S1403, and if the symbol variation is not being displayed, the process is shifted to step S1403. (Step S1402: No), the process shifts to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed is set to ON at the start of the variation display in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26 described later, and when the variation display time elapses (step S1403: Yes). The determination is made based on the variation display flag set to off in step S1405 of the variation game control process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display, and if it determines that the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variation display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variation game control process is terminated.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops and displays the symbols corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game on the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 (step S1403: Yes). Step S1404), the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation is not displayed (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 has a hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the hold storage area 412b and a hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB. It is determined whether or not both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number of holds N and the number of holds M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process. On the other hand, when either one of the number of holds N and the number of holds M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the data of the hit / miss information stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 finishes the process of step S1407, the process shifts to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a variation display based on the hit / miss information, and ends the variation game control process. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. 24. Hereinafter, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 25.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes). , The process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, when the number of holds M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA (step S1502), and shifts from the first hold area REA1 to the execution area AE. The pass / fail information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the pass / fail information of the second hold area REA2 is moved to the first hold area REA1, the pass / fail information of the third hold area REA3 is moved to the second hold area REA2, and the fourth hold area REA4. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505-S1507>
Step S1505 shifts to the case where the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 shifts to the case where both or one of the hold number M and the hold number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: No). Therefore, when the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the hold number N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the hit / fail information from the first hold area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserved area REB2 to the fourth reserved area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the pass / fail information of the second hold area REB2 is moved to the first hold area REB1, the pass / fail information of the third hold area REB3 is moved to the second hold area REB2, and the fourth hold area REB4. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the process of step S1507 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets a shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the pass / fail information of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 or the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 has been shifted. Then, the shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is changed. When the process of step S1508 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and shifts the process to step S1408 of FIG. 24.

[Fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 24. Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the high probability mode. Whether or not the high probability mode is set is determined based on, for example, whether or not the high probability mode flag set to be turned on in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23 is set to on. .. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1602 when the gaming state is in the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), and when the gaming state is not in the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, when the gaming state is in the low probability mode. If there is, the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 holds the hold storage area based on the high-probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 14B) saved according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the winning / failing information stored in the execution area AE of 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 is held based on the low-probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 14 (A)) saved according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the winning / failing information stored in the execution area AE of the storage area 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning.

In steps S1602 and S1603, the hit / fail determination is executed based on the high-probability mode hit / miss table or the low-probability mode hit / miss table saved according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. However, in steps S1602 and S1603, after reading the game setting value saved in step S1710 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later, a high probability mode hit / miss table or a low probability according to the game setting value is read. The pass / fail judgment may be performed by selecting the mode pass / fail table one by one.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 15A). Identify. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15B). .. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1602 or S1603 is wrong, the MPU 41 identifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table (see FIG. 15C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets the RAM 412 with a variation pattern command that includes the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern identified in step S1604. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

As described above, when the lottery result is "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 has "A01" to "A" in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Any one of "A03" is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "B01" to "B03" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "C01" to "C03" in which "C" indicating that the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "off", the MPU 41 changes any of "D01" to "D08" in which "D" indicating that the lottery results are out of "01" to "08" is added. Set to RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is "out of place", the MPU 41 includes information on whether the lottery result is "out of front / back", reach other than front / back out, or complete out of order in the variation pattern command.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 and ends the variation start process. The MPU 41 sets the variable display flag to ON when the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is started. This variation display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the variation game control process of FIG. 24 to determine whether or not the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is in progress. Further, when the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is started, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination based on the low probability mode hit / miss table in step S1603 is wrong, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive hits" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the hit / miss result is a big hit. In a certain case, clear the "number of consecutive deviations" to 0 times.

[Game setting value change process]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value changing process executed in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. 23. Hereinafter, the game setting value changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 27.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed, and if the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1701: Yes), the game setting value change process is terminated. If the symbol variation is not displayed (step S1701: No), the process shifts to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed is determined based on the variation display flag set on in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26.

<Step S1702>
If the symbol variation is not displayed (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the jackpot game state (step S1702), and if it is in the jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the game setting. When the value change process is completed and the game is not in the jackpot game state (step S1702: No), the process is shifted to step S1703. For example, whether or not it is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag set to be on in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23.

<Step S1703>
When neither the symbol variation display nor the jackpot game state (No in both steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703). It is determined whether or not the operation of turning on the power of the game setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the setting value changing operation unit 46. That is, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1701: Yes) or when the jackpot game is in the game state (step S1702: Yes), the game setting value is not displayed and the game setting value can be changed. Absent. Here, when the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1704 and turns on the power of the game setting value display unit 45 from off to on. If it is not switched to (step S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 described later (step S1703: Yes). S1704), the number indicating the read game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). As a result, the current game setting value can be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag indicating that the game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 to on (step S1706), and ends the game setting value change process.

<Step S1707>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is not switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The set value display flag indicates that the game set value is displayed on the game set value display unit 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708 when the set value display flag is set to on (step S1707: Yes), and when the set value display flag is set to off (step S1707: No). That is, when the game setting value display unit 45 is off and the power is not turned on, the game setting value change process is terminated.

<Step S1708>
When the set value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value changing operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation for changing the game set value has been performed. When the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1709, and when the set value changing operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No), The process proceeds to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of changing the display on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 before the rotation when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the right. On the contrary, when the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, a number one smaller than the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 is displayed before the rotation.

If the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "4" and the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the right, the game setting value display unit 45 is displayed. When the displayed number is changed to "1" and the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is "1" before rotation, the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left. In this case, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed to "4". Further, when the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is "4", the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is "1" so as not to rotate further to the right. In some cases, it may not rotate further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites and saves the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 as the game setting value in the game setting value of the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and ends the game setting value change process. As a result, when the power of the setting value changing operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game setting value saved in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally used as a valid game setting value of the RAM 412. It is stored in the game information storage area 412d. Therefore, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value changing operation unit 46. Then, the game setting value can be determined by turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 in a state where the number corresponding to the target game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45.

<Step S1711>
When the set value changing operation unit 46 is not rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, the set value. It is determined whether or not the operation of turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the change operation unit 46. When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1712, and the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off. If not (step S1711: No), the game setting value change process is terminated. When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the game setting value display unit 45 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment display, so that the game setting value is cut off. The number indicating is turned off, and the game setting value is confirmed as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 is set to a low probability mode according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710. A winning / failing table (see FIG. 14A) and a high-probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 14B) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the set value display flag to off, and ends the game setting value change process.

Here, in step S1712, the low-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 14 (A)) and the high-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 14 (B)) according to the game set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. ) Is selected. That is, since the winning / failing table of the same game setting value is selected between the low-probability mode winning / failing table and the high-probability mode winning / failing table, the operation of changing the game setting value is easy. However, the game setting value in the low probability mode and the game setting value in the high probability mode may be individually changed. In this case, for example, the game setting value in the low-probability mode is set to "1" and the game setting value in the high-probability mode is set to "4". It becomes possible to set a value.

[Performance information update processing]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1309 in the main process of FIG. 23. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28. Hereinafter, the specific performance information update process will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 41 reads out various numbers of payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and further determines the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Read out (step S1802). Here, the number of various payout balls is the number of payout balls required for updating the base information, etc., and is the number of general winning lot payout balls, the first winning lot payout number, the second winning lot payout number, and the variable winning lot payout ball. The number is applicable. Then, the MPU 41 calculates the current base BL based on the read-out number of general winning opening payout balls, the first winning opening payout number, and the number of out balls, and of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The current base BL is overwritten and updated (step S1803) (see FIG. 29 (A)). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 × (the number of balls paid out from the general winning opening + the number of balls paid out from the first winning opening) / the number of out balls.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
The MPU 41 reads out the cumulative jackpot lottery number (cumulative fluctuation display count) stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804), and updates the unit jackpot lottery number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1805). The unit jackpot lottery count is calculated as the symbol variation display count (the number of jackpot lottery received) of the 7-segment display 372 until the number of minus difference balls is 250 in the normal game state. Specifically, the unit jackpot lottery count = "cumulative jackpot lottery count" / (("out number of balls"-"general winning slot payout number"-"first winning slot payout number") / 250 balls) Will be done. In the present embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot lottery" is calculated as the cumulative number of unit jackpot lottery from the time the game machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present.

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of out balls read in step S1802 has reached 60,000 balls, and if the number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S1806: Yes), the process is performed in step S1807. If the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S1806: No), the specific performance information update process is terminated.

<Steps S1807 to S1810>
When the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 29 (A) and 29 (B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base (step S1807) in the base information, and steps S1803. The current base BL updated in step 1 is shifted to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1808), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1809). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of various payout balls and the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 (step S1810), and ends the specific performance information update process.

[Performance display monitor display control processing]
Here, FIGS. 30 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main process of FIG. 23. Hereinafter, the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 or step S1930 of FIG. 33, which will be described later. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1908 of FIG. 31 when the BL display flag is set to on (step S1901: Yes), and when the BL display flag is set to off (step S1901: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
When the BL display flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31 described later. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1918 in FIG. 32 when the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902: Yes), and when the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1902: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 two times before, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 32, which will be described later. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926 of FIG. 33 when the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903: Yes), and when the B2 display flag is set to off (step S1903: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
When the B2 display flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process shifts to step S1905, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from off to on (step S1904: No). End the display control process.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29 (A), "8.", "L", and "8" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 27 (B), the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating the presence are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to on (step S1906), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and performs the display control process. To finish.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in FIG. 29, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. 30 (step S1908). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1910 when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), and when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S191 to S1913>
When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1910), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29 (A), "8." and "1" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 33%. , "3", "3" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29 (B), the previous 60,000 balls "8.", "1", "2", and "9" indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to on (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), and sets the B1 display time counter. End the display control process.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process shifts to step S1915, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the corresponding End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, thereby indicating the current base BL. And the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1915) and clears the BL display time counter value to 0 (step S1915). S1916), the display control process is terminated.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902: Yes), as shown in FIG. 32, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. 31 (step). S1917), it is determined whether or not the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918). The MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1919 when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), and when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1919), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000-ball base B2 included in the information two times before (step S1920). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29 (A), "8." and "2" indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 two times before is 32%. , "3", and "2" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29 (B), 60,000 balls are used two times before. "8.", "2", "3", and "3" indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to on (step S1921), and sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to a fixed time for displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 two times before (step S1922). , The display control process is terminated.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process shifts to step S1924, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the corresponding End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1924) and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step). S1925), the display control process is terminated.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
When the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903: Yes), as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. 32 (step). S1926), it is determined whether or not the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1928 when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), and when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1928), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The current base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29 (A), "8.", "L", and "8" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 29 (B), the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating the presence are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to on (step S1930), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and performs the display control process. To finish.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process shifts to step S1933, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the corresponding End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the 60,000-ball base B2 is used two times before. The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1933) and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1933). S1934), the display control process is terminated.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 40.

In addition, it is considered as another embodiment that a part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Further, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing at the time of starting up the voice lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power failure, and the like. The description of these processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub-timer interrupt process as a periodic process having a 1 msec cycle.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 includes a counter update process (step S2001), a command determination process (step S2002), a variable game effect process (step S2003), and a jackpot game effect process (step S2004). , And the game setting value display process (step S2005) is executed.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, the effect pattern type counter, the fluctuation display counter, the control order pattern type counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of the main symbol to be stopped first based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Further, the effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This fluctuation display counter is for measuring the fluctuation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value in the fluctuation display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining fluctuation display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is in progress, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display unit 341 is completed, and the like. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the control order pattern type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, clears the counter value to 0. The control order pattern type counter updated here is used to determine the order to be controlled by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39. For example, the control order pattern type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2002), a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2002 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 35, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2102. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2101: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. The command received from the main control device 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in step S2101, and when it is targeted for processing, it is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area, for example, in the processing work storage area. Will be remembered.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2103 when it is a variable pattern command (step S2102: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2108 when the command is not a variable pattern command (step S2102: No).

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of the main symbol and effect type (effect pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 36 (A)), a variation type table (see FIG. 36 (B)), and an effect type table (see FIG. 36 (B)) stored in ROM 511 in advance. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on (see FIGS. 37 (A) to 37 (C)) and the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512. Further, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type to on. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, and sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type to on. Set the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to on when is a 16R probability variation jackpot.

The stop symbol combination of the main symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the main symbol that is first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is the second main symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the final stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed. It is a design. The effect type table includes a normal reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 37 (A)), a super reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 37 (B)), and a special reach. A special reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 37C) is included.

Here, FIG. 36A is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 36 (A), in the first stop symbol selection table, the main symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is defined. Note that FIG. 36 (A) shows a combination of symbols, "777", indicating that the main symbols are "1" to "9" and "333" is a probability variation jackpot (either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot). Is a symbol combination indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the doublet other than "333" and "777" is a symbol combination indicating that it is either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 16R probability variation jackpot. It is assumed.

If the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol has a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "7" is not sorted as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined from the main symbols other than "7" with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", doublet symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "333" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the doublet symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "333" whose stop display result of the main symbol suggests a 5R normal jackpot can be stopped and displayed. Then, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and the main symbol other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 is a 5R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game. Execute the 5R probability change promotion effect to be specified.

Furthermore, if the lottery result is "16 probability variation jackpot", there is a distribution for all the main symbols of "1" to "9", and the first stop is made with a predetermined probability from the main symbols of "1" to "9". The design is decided. That is, even when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", doublet symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the doublet symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "777" which suggests the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot is stopped and displayed as the stop display result of the main symbol. Can be done. Then, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion effect clearly indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game.

Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a big hit, the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined to be the same symbols as the first stop symbol previously determined. As a result, the stop symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the symbol display unit 341 is determined in the game round.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "missing", there is a distribution for all the main symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols "1" to "9". Will be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "out", the out-of-order type selected based on the out-of-type table (FIG. 14 (D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol are used. The second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the deviation type is front-back deviation reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the detachment type is reach other than the front-rear deviation, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the symbols before and after the first stop symbol and the first stop symbol. It is decided by the design. When the deviation type is completely out, the second stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The stop symbol combination of the main symbol may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the voice lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

Further, FIG. 36B is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 36 (B), in the variation type table, the contents of the variation display time and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command are defined. For example, the variation pattern command "A01" in which the lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the variation pattern is "01" is associated with the variation display time "30s" and the variation type "normal reach effect pattern". Further, the fluctuation pattern command "B02" whose lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and whose variation pattern is "02" is associated with the variation display time "60s" and the variation type "super reach effect pattern". , The fluctuation pattern command "C03" whose lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and whose variation pattern is "03" is associated with the variation display time "90s" and the variation type "special reach effect pattern". Further, the fluctuation pattern command "D04" in which the lottery result is "off" and the fluctuation pattern is "04" is associated with the fluctuation display time "7s" and the fluctuation type "non-reach effect pattern", and the lottery is performed. The variation pattern command "D05" whose result is "off" and the variation pattern is "05" is associated with the variation display time "10s" and the variation type "non-reach effect pattern".

Further, FIGS. 37 (A) to 37 (C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type selection table. The effect pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 37 (A) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect, and FIG. 37 (B) is the final individual effect type in the variable game effect. It is a super reach effect pattern type selection table referred to when the individual effect type is a super reach effect, and FIG. 37 (C) is referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a special reach effect. This is a special reach production pattern type selection table.

In the present embodiment, a case where there are five types of effects corresponding to each of the variable types will be described as an example, but there may be six or more types of effects. Further, in FIG. 37, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 37 (A), the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). "Production pattern X1" to "Production pattern X5" are defined as. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the normal reach effect pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the effect patterns X1 to the effect pattern X3 included in the normal reach effect pattern type selection table are, for example, an effect in which the normal reach effect in which the main symbol is in the reach state is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect in which the main symbol fluctuates at high speed. , The final individual production type is a normal reach production.

Further, in the super reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 37 (B), "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" are defined as the effect pattern types corresponding to the counter values of the effect pattern type counters according to the lottery result. Has been done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from the table. Here, in the effect patterns Y1 to the effect patterns Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect, and the final individual effect type is higher than the normal reach effect. It is a production that develops into a super reach production that is high and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The super reach effect pattern type selection table may include a super reach effect pattern effect that develops into a super reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect without going through the normal reach effect.

Further, in the special reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 37 (C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are defined as the effect pattern types corresponding to the counter values of the effect pattern type counters according to the lottery result. Has been done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from the table. Here, for the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the high-speed fluctuation effect is completed, and the normal reach effect and the super are as the final individual effect types. It is a production that develops into a special reach production that has a higher expectation of big hits than the reach production and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The special reach effect pattern type selection table includes a special reach effect pattern that develops into a special reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect or the normal reach effect, without going through at least one of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect. You may.

Then, the MPU 51 sends a variation pattern command, a variation type table, an effect type table, a stop symbol combination of the main symbol determined based on the effect type counter, and a display variation pattern command indicating the variation type (effect pattern type) to the RAM 512. Set.

<Step S2104>
Returning to the description of FIG. 35, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented one by one in the counter update processing of step S2001 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34, and the MPU 51 fluctuates whether or not the symbol fluctuation display is in progress based on the fluctuation display counter. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the display time. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol in the symbol display unit 341 and the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) to the display control device 6. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol determined in step S2103 and the variation type (effect pattern type). On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image and an effect image of the main symbol corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variation display of a plurality of main symbols (for example, three) until the preset variation display time elapses, and a plurality of variations are displayed. The fluctuation of the main symbol of is stopped and displayed in order. During the variation display of the main symbol, various effects corresponding to the contents of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. ..

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start the jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to on at the start of the jackpot game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2107 when the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), and processes when the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S2106: No). To step S2109.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game effect determination process (step S2107). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process for determining an effect to be executed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect, ending effect, and opening / closing execution mode effect executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to on. The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag for starting the jackpot game effect (opening effect), and determines whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. Referenced when making a decision.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating to start the round game in the open / close execution mode, and is set when the round game is started in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 23. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2110 when the received command is a round game start command (step S2109: Yes), and processes when the received command is not a round game start command (step S2109: No). To step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to on (step S2310). The round game start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2204 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating that the round game in the open / close execution mode is ended, and is set when the round game is ended in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 23. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2112 when the received command is a round game end command (step S211: Yes), and processes when the received command is not a round game end command (step S211: No). To step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S211: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to on (step S2312). The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2204 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a special out-ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the croon device 37, and is a command indicating that the game ball has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the croon device 37. It is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the interrupt process. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2114 when the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), and when the received command is not a special out-ball detection command (step S2113: No). , The process proceeds to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out-ball detection flag to on. The special out-ball detection flag is referred to when it is determined in step S2207 in the game set value display process of FIG. 38 whether or not to add the value of the special out-ball counter.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 23. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2116 when the received command is the ending start command (step S2115: Yes), and steps the process when the received command is not the ending start command (step S2115: No). Move to S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to on. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. Further, the ending effect start flag is referred to when it is determined in step S2201 in the game set value display process of FIG. 38 whether or not to move the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position. Will be done.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is terminated, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 23. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2118 when the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), and processes when the received command is not the jackpot game end command (step S2117: No). To step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to on. The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and whether or not to execute the ending effect end process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. It is referred to when judging. Further, the jackpot game effect end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to turn off the lit segment on the 7-segment display unit 39 in step S2301 in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 39.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a game setting value change command. The game setting value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 29. Will be done. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2120 when the received command is a game setting value change command (step S2119: Yes), and when the received command is not a game setting value change command (step S2119: No). , The process proceeds to step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed game setting value included in the game setting value change command and stores it. The game setting value stored in the RAM 512 is read out in step S2305 in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 39, which will be described later, and is referred to in order to determine the control order of the segments in the 7-segment display unit 39. To.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process after executing the process based on the other commands received from the main control device 4.

[Variable game production processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, in the variable game effect processing (step S2003) of the sub-timer interrupt process, in the variable game for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, when the variable pattern command is received, the command determination process of FIG. 35 is performed. The variable game effect according to the effect pattern determined in step S2103 is executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like.

[Big hit game production processing]
In the jackpot game effect processing (step S2004) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the opening effect, ending effect, and opening / closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. 35 are executed.

[Game setting value display processing]
In the game set value display process (step S2005) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper unit 383 of the game ball retention unit 38 is controlled, and the lighting and extinguishing of each segment of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled. .. Here, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the game setting value display process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 35.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 38, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to be turned on in step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. 35. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing when the ending effect is started by the ending effect start flag. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2202 when the ending effect start flag is set to on (step S2201: Yes), and when the ending effect start flag is set to off (step S2201: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2206.

<Step S2202>
When the ending effect start flag is set to on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag, which can be set to on in step S2103 of the command determination process of FIG. 35, is set to on. Is determined (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to move the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position by the 5R normal jackpot flag. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2203 when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to on (step S2202: Yes), and when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to off (step S2202: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2206.

<Step S2203>
When the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2203). As a result, when the game ball 99 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention unit 38, the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382. At this time, the game ball 99 moved from the retention lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

<Steps S2204 and S2205>
When the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2203), the MPU 51 sets the stopper portion lowering moving flag indicating that the stopper portion 383 is moving downward to on. (Step S2204). The lowering stopper flag is referred to in step S2207 to determine whether the special out-ball detection flag set to on in step S2112 in the command determination process of FIG. 35 is set to on. Then, the MPU 51 sets a downward movement time counter corresponding to the time until the stopper portion 383 is returned to the upper limit position (step S2205).

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 sets off the jackpot type flags (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R probability variation jackpot flag) that can be set on in step S2103 of the command determination process of FIG. 35.

<Step S2207>
When the ending effect start flag is set to off (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the stopper portion lowering moving flag set to be on in step S2204 is set to on (step S2207). ). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game ball (special out ball) stayed in the stay lane 381 is at the timing that can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2208 when the stopper portion lowering moving flag is set to on (step S2207: Yes), and when the stopper portion lowering moving flag is set to off (step S2207). : No), the game setting value display process is terminated.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
When the flag for moving down the stopper is set to ON (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special out-ball detection flag is set to ON (Step S2208). The special out-ball detection flag is a flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the special out-ball sensor 384, and is set to on in step S2114 in the command determination process of FIG. 35. Here, when the special out-ball detection flag is set to ON (step S2208: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out-ball counter set to be stored in the RAM 512 (step S2208) and processes it. To step S2210, and when the special out-ball detection flag is set to off (step S2208: No), the process proceeds to step S2210.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the down movement time counter set in step S2205. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 at the lower limit position to the upper limit position. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2212 when the value of the down movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), and when the value of the down movement time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), the said The game setting value display process is terminated.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
When the value of the lower movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 upward from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and turns it on in step S2204. The set stopper moving down flag is set to off (step S2213). As a result, the game ball retention unit 38 is returned to a state in which the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381.

<Step S2214>
In step S2214, the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment display unit control process for controlling the lighting state of the 7-segment display unit 39. The 7-segment display unit control process will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 39.

[7-segment display control process]
Here, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in the game setting value display process of FIG. 38.

<Step S2301>
As shown in FIG. 39, in step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON. The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to end the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and is set to on in step S2118 in the command determination process of FIG. 35. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to turn off the lit segment on the 7-segment display unit 39. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2310 when the jackpot game effect end flag is set to on (step S2301: Yes), and when the jackpot game effect end flag is set to off (step S2301). : No), the process proceeds to step S2302.

<Step S2302>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is set to off (step S2301: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 7-segment display displaying flag is set to on (step S2302). The 7-segment display displaying flag is a flag indicating that any of the segments of the 7-segment display unit 39 may be lit, and is set to on in step S2309 described later.

<Steps S2303 and S2304>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 acquires the value of the special out-ball counter added in step S2209 of FIG. 38 and stored in the RAM 512, and determines whether or not the value of the special out-ball counter is 0 (step S2304). ). The value of the special out ball counter is the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37 by winning a prize in the variable winning opening 316 during a predetermined period (the period from the start of the jackpot game of the first hit to the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the normal jackpot). It is the number of special out balls that have entered the ball. Then, when the value of the special out-ball counter is 0 (step S2304: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the 7-segment display unit control process because it is not necessary to light the segment of the 7-segment display unit 39. On the other hand, when the value of the special out-ball counter is not 0 (step S2304: No), the process proceeds to step S2305.

<Steps S2305 and S2306>
In step S2305, the MPU 51 acquires the game set value stored in the RAM 512 and selects the control order pattern type based on the game set value (step S2306). Specifically, the MPU 51 selects a control order pattern type according to the game set value from six control order pattern type selection tables (see FIGS. 40 (B) and 40 (C)) set for each game set value. The table is selected, the value of the control rank pattern type counter is acquired, and the control rank pattern type corresponding to the value of the control rank pattern type counter is selected from the control rank pattern type selection table.

Here, before explaining the control order pattern type, the lighting state or the extinguishing state and the display numerical value of each segment A to G (see FIG. 11A) in the 7-segment display unit 39 with reference to FIG. 40A. The correspondence with and is explained.

As shown in FIG. 40 (A), the control state (power supply (lighting) or shutoff (off)) of each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 with respect to the numerical values 1 to 6 displayed as the game setting value is set. It shows. The player has a number (game setting value) displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on whether the segments A to G to be controlled are in the lit state or the extinguished state according to the number of special out balls. It is possible to guess. For example, when power is supplied to segment A and the segment A is turned on, the game set values 2, 3, 5, and 6 are set as described above, and the power to segment A is cut off. When the segment A is turned off, it can be determined that the game setting values 1 and 4 are set. Similarly, for the other segments B to G, it is possible to estimate the game set value based on whether the segment is in the lit state or in the extinguished state. However, as described above, the segments A to G are important in estimating the game setting value, that is, the ease of estimating the game setting value itself, and the judgment of the level of the game setting value independently. The ease of playing is different, and the game setting value and the ease of guessing its height are different depending on the combination with other segments. Then, the game setting value can be determined more accurately by the combination of the lighting state and the extinguishing state of a plurality of segments A to G, and the larger the number of segments to be controlled, the more accurate it is. The game set value can be determined, and the game set value can be recognized by controlling all of at least seven segments A to G (see FIG. 11B). Further, depending on the game set value and the control order, the game set value can be recognized before all the seven segments A to G are controlled.

Here, FIG. 40 (B) is a control order pattern type selection table when the game setting value is 1, and FIG. 40 (C) is a control order pattern type selection table when the game setting value is 1. Although the control order pattern type selection table for the game setting values 2 to 4 is omitted, the control order pattern type selection table is set for each game setting value. The control order pattern type selection table is a table for determining the priority order of which of the segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39 is to be lit, and the control order pattern is set by the control order pattern type counter. It is stipulated.

In the present embodiment, seven control order patterns are defined for each game set value. The seven control order patterns defined for each game set value include a control order pattern in which it is difficult to estimate the game set value, and it is easy to select a control order pattern in which it is difficult to estimate the game set value. Is preferable. For example, when the game setting value is 1, as shown in FIG. 40 (B), the pattern A1 is most likely to be selected, then the pattern B1 is most likely to be selected, then the patterns C1 to E1 are easily selected, and the patterns F1 and G1 are easily selected. Is hard to be selected.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (A), when the game setting value is 1, when there is one control target, the segment A becomes the control target and the two game setting values are not lit. It can be determined that it is either 1 or 2, segment B can be determined to be one of the four game setting values 1 to 4 when it is lit as a control target, and segment C becomes a control target. It can be determined that the game is set to one of the five game setting values 1, 3, 4 to 6 when the light is turned on, and the segment D is controlled by any of the two game set values 1 and 4 when the game is not turned on. It can be determined that there is, segment E can be determined to be one of the four game setting values 1, 3, 4, 5 at the stage where it is controlled and not lit, and segment F is controlled and not lit. It can be determined that the game setting value is one of the three game setting values 1 to 3, and it is determined that the game setting value is 1 when the segment G is controlled and is not lit. That is, it is difficult to guess the game setting value because it can be determined that the segment C is one of the five game setting values including the game setting value 1, and the segments B and E are the four games including the game setting value 1. Since it can be determined that it is one of the set values, it is difficult to guess the game set value, so the priority to be controlled tends to be high. On the other hand, since it is determined that the game setting value is 1 when the segment G is not lit, the priority order in which the segment G is the control target is the lowest among the seven segments A to G. Since it can be determined that the segment F is one of the three game setting values including the game setting value 1 and the segments A and D are any of the two game setting values including the game setting value 1, these segments A and D. , F tends to have a lower priority than segments B, C and E, but tends to have a higher priority than segment G.

When the game setting value is 6, as expected from FIG. 40 (A), the priority tends to be higher in the order of segment C, G → segment A, D → segment F → segment B, E. .. When the game setting value is 6, patterns A6 to D6 are most likely to be selected, then pattern E6 is most likely to be selected, and patterns F6 and G6 are difficult to be selected, as shown in FIG. 40 (C). Similarly, for the game set values 2 to 5, the control order pattern type and its selection rate are appropriately determined so that the segment whose game set value is difficult to guess tends to have a higher priority order to be controlled.

In the present embodiment, a control order pattern type selection table is prepared for each game setting value, and the order of the segments A to G to be controlled is determined based on the control order pattern type selection table corresponding to the game setting value. However, each time the game ball 99 is detected by the special out-ball sensor 384, the segments A to G to be controlled may be selected by lottery.

<Steps S2307 to 2309>
Returning to the description of FIG. 39, in step S2307, the MPU 51 has seven segments based on the value of the special out-ball counter acquired in step S2303 and the control order pattern type selected according to the game setting value in step S2308. Control each segment A to G of the display unit 39. Then, the MPU 51 clears the value of the special out-ball counter (step S2308), sets the 7-segment display in-progress flag to on (step S2309), and ends the 7-segment display unit control process.

Here, a control example of each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 when the game setting value is 1 and the pattern A1 (see FIG. 40B) is selected as the control order pattern will be described.

For example, when the value of the special out-ball counter is 1, the segment C is turned on by supplying electric power to the segment C to be controlled. In this case, the game set value 2 is denied, and it can be determined that the game set value is any of 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

When the value of the special out-ball counter is 2, the extinguishing state of the segment E to be controlled is maintained. In this case, since it is not possible to determine whether or not the control target this time is segment E, it is not possible to determine whether the game setting value is 1, 4, 5, or 6 even if the off state of segment E is maintained.

When the value of the special out-ball counter is 3, the segment B is turned on by supplying electric power to the segment B to be controlled. In this case, since the number of special out balls is 3 and the segments B and C are lit, the game setting values 5 and 6 are denied, and it can be determined that the game setting value is one of 1, 3 and 4. ..

When the value of the special out-ball counter is 4, the extinguishing state of the segment A to be controlled is maintained. In this case, since it is not possible to determine whether or not the control target this time is segment A, it is not possible to determine whether the game setting value is 1, 3 or 4 even if the off state of segment A is maintained.

When the value of the special out-ball counter is 5, the off state of the segment D to be controlled is maintained. In this case, since the segments B and C are lit and three of the remaining five segments A, D to G are controlled and turned off, the two segments E and F are turned off. The value 3 is denied. Therefore, it can be determined that the game set value is either 1 or 4.

When the value of the special out-ball counter is 6, the extinguished state of the segment F to be controlled is maintained. In this case, the segments B and C are lit, and four of the remaining five segments A, D to G are controlled and turned off, so that the three segments A, D and E are turned off. The game setting value 4 is denied. Therefore, it is determined that the game set value is 1.

When the value of the special out-ball counter is 7 or more, the extinguished state of the segment G to be controlled is maintained. In this case, it is confirmed that the game set value is 1 as in the case where the value of the special out-ball counter is 6.

Further, a control example of each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 when the game setting value is 6 and the pattern C6 (see FIG. 40C) is selected as the control order pattern will be described.

For example, when the value of the special out-ball counter is 1, the segment G is turned on by supplying electric power to the segment G to be controlled. In this case, the game set value 1 is denied, and it can be determined that the game set value is any of 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

When the value of the special out-ball counter is 2, the segment D is turned on by supplying electric power to the segment D to be controlled. In this case, since the number of special out balls is 2 and the segments D and G are lit, the game setting value 4 is denied, and it can be determined that the game setting value is any of 2, 3, 5, and 6. ..

When the value of the special out-ball counter is 3, the segment A is turned on by supplying electric power to the segment A to be controlled. In this case, since the number of special out balls is 3 and the segments A, D, and G are lit, it cannot be determined whether the game setting value is 2, 3, 5, or 6.

When the value of the special out-ball counter is 4, the segment C is turned on by supplying electric power to the segment C to be controlled. In this case, since the number of special out balls is 4 and the segments A, C, D, and G are lit, the game setting value 2 is denied, and the game setting value is any of 3, 5 and 6. I can judge.

When the value of the special out-ball counter is 5, the segment F is turned on by supplying electric power to the segment F to be controlled. In this case, since the number of special out balls is 5 and the segments A, C, D, F, and G are lit, the game setting value 3 is denied, and the game setting value is any of 5 and 6. I can judge.

When the value of the special out-ball counter is 6, the off state of the segment B to be controlled is maintained. In this case, since the number of special out balls is 6, the segments A, C, D, F, and G are lit and any of the segments B and E is off, the game setting value is any of 5 and 6. It cannot be determined whether it is.

When the value of the special out-ball counter is 7 or more, the segment E is turned on by supplying electric power to the segment E to be controlled. In this case, since the number of special out balls is 7 or more and the segments A, C, D, E, F, and G are lit, it is confirmed that the game setting value is 6.

As described above, each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is based on the value of the special out-ball counter acquired in step S2303 and the control order pattern type selected according to the game setting value in step S2308. By controlling the above, the corresponding segment of the seven segments A to G on the seven-segment display unit 39 is lit based on the game setting value, the value of the special out-ball counter, and the control order pattern type. Will be done. As a result, the player can infer the game set value based on the number of special out balls and the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39.

When a plurality of segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled targets, these segments A to G may be controlled at the same time, or the segments A to G may be controlled with a time difference according to the control order. You may. When the segments A to G are controlled at the same time, the control target segment may be turned on or off after blinking the number of the control target segments corresponding to the number of all the segments A to G or the special out balls. On the other hand, when a plurality of segments A to G are controlled by a time difference, the time difference is, for example, about 0.1 to 5 seconds, and the control target is controlled by blinking the segments A to G to be controlled. After clearly indicating that, the control target segments A to G may be turned on or off.

<Steps S231 to 2312>
Returning to the description of FIG. 39, when the jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the lit segment on the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2310). Then, the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment display flag indicating that the 7-segment display unit 39 is being displayed to on (step S2311), and further sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2312). The 7-segment display unit control process is terminated.

By the way, some game machines have a plurality of game setting values having different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery, and the game hall side can select the game setting value. In this case, the game hall wants to set the game setting value low in order to lower the expected ball output value. Then, when the game setting value is set low, the game setting value is set to the player because it is desired to prevent the player from stopping the game because the player recognizes that the game setting value is low. There is a tendency to want to be an unknown game machine. Further, as a game machine, for example, at a predetermined timing such as when a jackpot is confirmed, when a jackpot game starts, or when a jackpot game ends, there is a game machine that suggests or clearly indicates a game setting value by an image selected by lottery.

On the other hand, the player guesses the game setting value (narrows down to a plurality of game setting values) for the game machine having the game setting value in order to play the game with the game machine 10 having a higher expected ball output value. I want playability that can be recognized. In this way, there is a tendency for the game hall and the player to desire to conflict with each other.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, among the game balls 99 that have won the variable winning opening 316 in the predetermined period from the start of the first hit jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode, the special croon device 37 The game ball (special out ball) that has entered the out ball mouth 373 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38. Then, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) stayed in the staying lane 381 after the elapse of a predetermined period is counted, and the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled by the number corresponding to the count number. To do. That is, unless at least the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot and shifts to the jackpot game, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are neither controlled nor turned on. Therefore, the game set value is not estimated or recognized unless the game is shifted to the jackpot game.

Further, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37, for example, one or two balls for one 16R jackpot game (about one ball for 10R of the round game). It is expected that the game ball 99 will enter. Therefore, it is difficult to guess or recognize the game set value by the 7-segment display unit 39 in one big hit (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, during the predetermined period, the jackpot game (opening) executed when the lottery result in the low probability mode becomes a jackpot is started, and then the opening / closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game ends (ending starts). Until then. In other words, if the first hit is a probabilistic jackpot, the predetermined period will not end as long as the jackpot consecutive villa in the high probability mode continues, and the opening and closing of the normal jackpot game when the normal jackpot is won will be executed. It continues until the mode ends. That is, in the present embodiment, while it has a game property that it is not easy to recognize the game set value, as the jackpot consecutive villa in the high probability mode continues, more games are played in the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37. The ball 99 is expected to enter, the game set value can be estimated more accurately, and at least when seven or more game balls 99 are inserted into the special out ball mouth 373, the game set value can be reliably recognized.

By the way, in a conventional slot machine, an image suggesting or clearly indicating a game setting value may be displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which a game effect is executed. Images that suggest or clearly indicate game setting values are displayed on, for example, the jackpot confirmation screen, jackpot start screen, jackpot end screen, start screens such as ART and AT, continuation screens, and end screens, and the contents of the displayed images are drawn by lottery. It is determined. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game is set stepwise according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37 in the predetermined period. Information for estimating the value is displayed, and the game has a game property in which it is difficult to estimate or recognize the game set value. Therefore, the suggestion or clarification of the game setting value as in the present embodiment is a novel one that is fundamentally different from the one that has been conventionally adopted in a game machine such as a slot machine.

As described above, in the present embodiment, while the game setting value can be estimated or confirmed, more game balls can be estimated in order to narrow down the game setting value to a plurality of game setting values or to recognize the game setting value. It is necessary to put 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37, and there is a high hurdle until the game set value can be estimated or recognized. Therefore, the game hall has an advantage that the game setting value is not easily known to the player. On the other hand, the player has an advantage that the game set value can be estimated or recognized. In addition, it is possible to estimate or recognize the game setting value on condition that the jackpot lottery is won, and the accuracy of the estimation of the game setting value is probable. When the accuracy of the estimation of the game setting value is improved by continuing the jackpot. Depending on the situation, the game machine 10 can be provided with a game property that the game set value can be recognized. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the player.

Further, when the jackpot game is started, the game is not ended in the middle of the jackpot game unless there are special circumstances, and the game is not ended in the high probability mode in the high probability mode. Therefore, since the predetermined period is the period from the start of the jackpot game of the first hit to the end of the open / close execution mode of the normal jackpot, it is prevented that the player ends the game before the predetermined period ends. As a result, even if a player who does not know the timing at which the game set value can be estimated or recognized (the end of a predetermined period) advances the game, the game is played immediately before the game set value becomes estimated or recognizable. It is prevented from terminating. Therefore, even a player who cannot know the timing at which the game set value can be estimated or recognized can estimate or recognize the game set value. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena act of another player who plays a game aiming at a timing at which the game set value can be estimated or recognized.

Further, since the start time of the predetermined period is the start time of the jackpot game for the first hit, not only is it a condition that at least one jackpot win is required before the game set value can be estimated or recognized, and even if the predetermined period is set. Even if it is started, since the hurdle to guess or recognize the game set value is high as described above, a considerable number of game balls 99 are fired on the game board 31 until the game set value is guessed or recognized to some extent. However, you will receive a considerable number of jackpot lottery. Therefore, at the stage of estimating or recognizing the game set value with high accuracy, it is highly possible that the number of unit jackpot lottery (easiness of receiving the jackpot lottery) has reached a stage where it can be sufficiently determined. As a result, when the player can estimate or recognize the game set value with high accuracy, the player can determine the ball ejection performance of the game machine 10 during the game including not only the game set value but also the number of unit jackpot lottery. , It becomes possible to judge whether to continue the game. For example, even when the game setting value is low, if the number of unit jackpot lottery is large, it is possible to determine that the game will be continued in consideration of comprehensive consideration. On the other hand, even when the game setting value is high, if the number of unit jackpot lottery is small, it is possible to make a judgment that the continuation of the game is abandoned in consideration of comprehensive consideration.

In the present embodiment, when the first hit is a probabilistic jackpot, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first hit jackpot game to the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the high probability mode. The predetermined period may be set one by one for each jackpot regardless of the jackpot type. That is, a predetermined period may be set for each big hit game regardless of the first hit or the big hit consecutive villa hit. In this case, the start time of the jackpot game or the open / close execution mode is started, and the end time of the jackpot game or the open / close execution mode is the end of the predetermined period. Further, every time the predetermined period ends, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled so that the segments A to G according to the number of special out balls are controlled, and the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled once for each jackpot game. It may be. In this case, the lighting segment of the 7-segment display unit 39 may be turned off at the end of the jackpot game, or if the first hit is a probabilistic jackpot, the normal jackpot is won and 7 until the normal jackpot game ends. The displayed state of the segment display unit 39 may be maintained. Then, in the case where a predetermined period is set one by one for each jackpot, if the first hit is a probabilistic jackpot, the display state of the 7-segment display unit 39 due to the previous jackpot is special for this jackpot. A number of segments corresponding to the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) entered into the out ball mouth 373 may be added and used as a control target. That is, when the first hit is a probabilistic jackpot, the special out balls from the jackpot game for the first hit to the end of the open / close execution mode of the normal jackpot game are accumulated for each jackpot game, and for each jackpot game. Segments A to G according to the number of special out balls accumulated in may be controlled.

In the present embodiment, instead of or in addition to the game set value, a part or all of other information may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Other information includes, for example, profit information regarding the profit status of the player in the progress of the game. As this profit information, for example, performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 and the expected ball ejection value (for example, the total number of launched game balls when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are launched). (Ratio of expected number of balls to be paid out (number of game balls to be paid out) to (total number of out balls)), latent probability change, jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (for example, probability variation jackpot, normal Big hit (short-time mode transition big hit), falling to low probability mode at the time of latent probability change, etc.

Performance information and expected value of ball output are usually the ending of the jackpot game, latent probability change and falling to the low probability mode are variable games, and the jackpot type is the jackpot game, and part or all of the profit information is divided into 7 segments. It may be displayed on the display unit 39. Further, when displaying a part or all of the profit information on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the variable game, one of the profit information when a specific condition different from the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 is satisfied. All or all of the parts are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Specific conditions in this case include, for example, the number of jackpot lottery and the number of general drawing lottery reaching a specific number after the transition to the variable game. In addition, when the 7-segment display unit 39 displays the latent probability change or the fall from the latent probability change to the low probability mode as profit information in the variable game, until the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the latent probability change becomes a big hit, or from the latent probability change. The period until the fall is a predetermined period for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied.

However, the profit information to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is not the one whose profit status can be grasped by other triggers, except when it is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 when a specific condition is satisfied. It is preferable that the profit status cannot be grasped. Examples of the former include, for example, the jackpot type in the jackpot lottery, the latent probability change, and its fall. The latter example includes performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 and the expected ball ejection value.

Here, when a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the player may, for example, make an individual difference or aged time at the time of manufacturing the game machine 10. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning openings 313 to 316 between the game machines due to changes or the like. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the ball ejection performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316, and if the ball ejection performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 can be grasped, the game during the game is based on the performance information. An opportunity is given to decide whether to continue the game on the machine 10.

Here, examples of the performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 include unit jackpot lottery number information, base information, continuous bonus ratio information, bonus ratio information, and the like.

Since the unit jackpot lottery count is an index showing the ease of receiving the jackpot lottery in the normal game state (the state where the low probability mode is not the high frequency support mode), a part or all of the unit jackpot lottery count information is 7 segments. By being displayed on the display unit 39, it becomes possible to know how easy it is to receive the big hit lottery. As a result, the player guesses the number of unit jackpot lottery and enjoys it, and if the number of unit jackpot lottery can be grasped, determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit jackpot lottery. You will be given the opportunity to do so.

Since the base information is an index showing the ease of winning the first winning opening 314 and the general winning opening 313, a part or all of the base information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, so that the first prize can be obtained. It becomes possible to know how easy it is to win a prize in the winning opening 314 and the general winning opening 313. As a result, the player is given an opportunity to guess and enjoy the base, and if the base can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game on the game machine being played based on the base.

The continuous bonus ratio information includes the frequency with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot game state (stay ratio in the jackpot game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening 316 (in the special game state). It is an index showing the ball output rate). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the continuous bonus ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, so that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot game state. It becomes possible to know the frequency of winning and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening 316. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, and if the continuous bonus ratio can be grasped, determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous bonus ratio. You will be given the opportunity to do so.

The accessory ratio information includes the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot gaming state (stay ratio in the jackpot gaming state), the stay ratio in the high frequency support mode supported by the electric accessory 315b, and variable. It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the winning opening 316 and the second winning opening 315 (the ball output rate in the jackpot game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the character ratio, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot game state. It becomes possible to know the frequency of the winning, the stay ratio of the high frequency support mode receiving the support of the electric accessory 315b, and the ease of winning the variable winning opening 316 and the second winning opening 315. As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess and enjoy the character ratio, and if the character ratio can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

On the other hand, when the expected ball ejection value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, in addition to the ball ejection performance based on the game set value, the state of the nails placed on the game board 31 and the surface texture of the game board 31 are taken into consideration. You can evaluate the ball ejection performance. Therefore, the player can more appropriately estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance. Further, the expected ball output value may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a sufficiency rate with respect to the border line.

Further, the stopper portion 383 may be omitted so that the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without staying. In this case, the number of special out balls may be counted until the end of the predetermined period, and after the end of the predetermined period, the number of segments A to G corresponding to the number of special out balls may be controlled, and the special out balls are the special out ball sensor. Each time it is detected by 384, the segments A to G may be controlled in the order according to the control order pattern type. In the former case, a predetermined period is a specific condition, but in the latter case, the entry of a game ball into the special out ball mouth 373 (or detection of a special out ball by the special out ball sensor 384) is a specific condition. It becomes.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as that of the game machine 10 described in the first embodiment described above and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the above-mentioned first embodiment and the following other embodiments.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a croon device 37 having a special out ball mouth 373 that is difficult to enter and a game ball retention portion 38 are provided in the right side region of the game board 31, and the ball enters the variable winning opening 316 in a predetermined period. Then, on condition that the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39, which are the number corresponding to the number of special out balls in a predetermined period, are controlled. The case where a part or all of the numerical values corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, every time a game ball exceeding the upper limit number (“9” in the present embodiment) is won in the variable winning opening in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode (so-called over winning occurs). ), It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the segments of the 7-segment display unit are controlled in the order according to the control order pattern type. That is, the condition (specific condition) in which the segment of the 7-segment display unit is controlled is not limited to the passage of the game ball through a specific area such as the special out ball mouth 373.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the number of segments of the 7-segment display unit corresponding to the number of over-winnings in a predetermined period is controlled on the condition that the over-winning is performed at the variable winning opening. The Kroon device 37 and the game ball retention unit 38 in the embodiment of the above are not required. As a result, the effect of the above-described first embodiment can be enjoyed while simplifying the configuration of the game machine 10.

In addition, when an over-winning occurs, the player can obtain a profit larger than the profit obtained by winning the maximum number of game balls in the variable winning opening, so that the segment is controlled on the condition of the over-winning. As a result, not only the profit as an over-winning but also the opportunity to guess or recognize the game setting value is given, and the over-winning gives the player a larger profit. That is, it is an example in which the possibility that a specific condition is satisfied increases as the profit acquired by the player increases. For example, the specific condition is satisfied when a profit exceeding the expected value of the profit normally obtained is obtained.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Since this embodiment has the above-mentioned differences from the above-mentioned first embodiment, the procedures of the command determination processing, the jackpot game effect processing, and the game setting value display processing are different from those of the above-mentioned first embodiment. different.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2002) of the present embodiment, a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, since the game ball retention unit 38 is omitted, the special out-ball detection command is not set. Therefore, a step of determining whether or not the received command is a special out-ball detection command. Is omitted.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the command determination process in the present embodiment, after executing the processes in steps S2101 to S2112 similar to the command determination process in the first embodiment described above, the MPU 51 receives the command. It is determined whether or not it is a variable winning opening winning command (step S2401). Then, when the received command is a variable winning opening winning command (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the variable winning opening winning flag to ON (step S2402), and ends the command determination process. On the other hand, when the received command is not a variable winning opening winning command (step S2401: No), the processing of steps S2115 to S2121 similar to the command determination processing in the first embodiment described above is executed, and the command determination processing is performed. finish.

[Big hit game production processing]
In the jackpot game effect processing (step S2004) of the sub-timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the opening effect, ending effect, and opening / closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. 41 are executed. Will be done. Here, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 42, in step S2501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag set to be on in step S2108 in the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set to on, and the jackpot game effect. When the start flag is on (step S2501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2502, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2501: No), the process proceeds to step S2504.

<Steps S2502 and S2503>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to off (step S2502), executes the opening effect start process (step S2503), and executes the jackpot game effect start process (step S2503). The production process ends. In the opening effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute the opening effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. 41, and also causes the display control device 6 to execute the opening effect. An opening effect start command for starting the image effect as the opening effect on the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 displays an image corresponding to the opening effect.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect start flag set to be on in step S2310 in the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set to on, and when the round game effect start flag is on. (Step S2504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2505, and when the round game start flag is off (step S2504: No), the process proceeds to step S2508.

<Steps S2505 to S2507>
When the round game effect start flag is on (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to off (step S2505), executes the round game effect start process (step S2506), and further rounds. The game execution flag is set to on (step S2507), and the jackpot game production process ends. Here, in the round game effect start process of step S2506, the MPU 51 performs the round game effect in the corresponding round in the open / close execution mode effect scenario determined by the jackpot game effect determination process of step S2107 in the command determination process of FIG. 41. Is executed by the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, and a round game start command is transmitted to the display control device 6 to cause the symbol display unit 341 to start the image effect as the round game effect in the corresponding round. This round game start command includes round number information indicating the number of rounds. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 displays an image corresponding to the round game effect of the round.

<Step S2508>
In step S2508, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect end flag set to be turned on in step S2112 in the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set to on. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2509 when the round game effect end flag is on (step S2508: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2511 when the round game effect end flag is off (step S2508: No). ..

<Steps S2509 and S2510>
When the round game effect end flag is on (step S2508: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to off (step S2509) and sets the round game execution flag to off (step S2510). The jackpot game production process is completed.

<Step S2511>
In step S2511, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending start flag set to be on in step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set to on, and when the ending start flag is on (step S2511: Yes). ), The process proceeds to step S2512, and when the ending start flag is off (step S2511: No), the process proceeds to step S2514.

<Step S2512>
When the ending start flag is on (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the ending effect start process (step S2512) and ends the jackpot game effect process. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute the ending effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of step S2107 in the command determination process of FIG. 41, and causes the display control device 6 to execute the ending effect. The ending effect start command for starting the image effect as the ending effect on the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 displays an image corresponding to the ending basic effect.

<Step S2513>
In step S2513, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag set to be on in step S2118 in the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set to on, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is on ( Step S2513: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2514, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2513: No), the jackpot game effect process ends.

<Steps S2514 and S2515>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2513: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2514), executes the ending effect end process (step S2515), and executes the jackpot game effect end process (step S2515). The production process ends.

[Game setting value display processing]
In the game setting value display processing (step S2005) of the sub-timer interrupt processing, the segment A to be controlled by the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the number of over-winning game balls for the variable winning opening 316 in the round game in the open / close execution mode. The lighting and extinguishing of ~ G are controlled. Here, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value display process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 43, in step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to be turned on in step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. 41. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing when the ending effect is started by the ending effect start flag. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2602 when the ending effect start flag is set to on (step S2601: Yes), and when the ending effect start flag is set to off (step S2601: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2605.

<Step S2602>
When the ending effect start flag is set to off (step S2601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game execution flag set to be on in step S2507 of FIG. 42 is set to on. (Step S2602). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variable winning opening 316 is open and it is the timing at which the over-winning at the variable winning opening 316 can occur. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2603 when the round game execution flag is set to on (step S2602: Yes), and when the round game execution flag is set to off (step S2602). : No), the game setting value display process is terminated.

<Step S2603>
When the round game execution flag is set to on (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 is set to the variable winning opening winning flag set to be on in step S2402 in the command determination process of FIG. 41. Whether or not it is determined (step S2603). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game ball has been won in the variable winning opening 316 based on the variable winning opening winning flag. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2604 when the variable winning opening winning flag is set to on (step S2603: Yes), and when the variable winning opening winning flag is set to off (step S2603). : No), the game setting value display process is terminated.

<Steps S2604 to S2606>
When the variable winning opening winning flag is set to on (step S2603: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the variable winning opening winning counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2604), and sets the variable winning opening winning flag. Set to off (step S2605). Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the variable winning opening winning counter after the addition exceeds the upper limit of the number of winnings of the game ball for closing the variable winning opening 316 (step S2606). Here, when the value of the variable winning opening winning counter exceeds the upper limit number (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2606, and the value of the variable winning opening winning counter does not exceed the upper limit number. In the case (step S2606: No), the game setting value display process is terminated.

<Step S2607>
When the value of the variable winning opening winning counter exceeds the upper limit number (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the over winning counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2607), and displays the game setting value. To finish. The over-winning counter is referred to in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 44, which will be described later, in order to determine the number of segments to be controlled by the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2608>
When the ending effect start flag is set to on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag, which can be set to on in step S2103 of the command determination process of FIG. 41, is set to on. Is determined (step S2607). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to display a part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 by the 5R normal jackpot flag. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2609 when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to on (step S2608: Yes), and when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to off (step S2608: No). ), The game setting value display process is terminated.

<Steps S2609 and S2610>
When the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to on (step S2608: Yes), the MPU 51 is a jackpot type flag (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variation jackpot flag) that can be set to on in step S2103 of the command determination process of FIG. , 16R probability variation jackpot flag) is set to off (step S2609). Then, the MPU 51 executes the 7-segment display unit control process for controlling the lighting state of the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2610). The 7-segment display unit control process will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 44.

[7-segment display control process]
In the 7-segment display unit control process of the present embodiment, the game set value display of FIG. 43 is replaced with the value of the special out-ball counter (see FIG. 39) of the 7-segment display unit control process of the first embodiment described above. The number of segments A to G to be controlled by the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the value of the over-winning counter added in step S2607 in the process. Here, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in step S2610 in the game set value display process of FIG. 43.

<Steps S2701 and S2702>
As shown in FIG. 44, the jackpot game effect end flag set to be on in step S2118 in the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set to off (step S2301: No), and is set to on in step S2309 described later. When the segment display flag is set to ON (step S2302: No), the value of the over winning counter added in step S2606 is acquired (step S2701), and step S2606 in the game setting value display process of FIG. 43 is obtained. It is determined whether or not the value of the over winning counter added in is 0 (step S2702).

<Step S2703>
When the value of the over winning counter is 0 (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 acquires the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 (step S2305), and the control order pattern type selected according to the game setting value. After selecting the control order pattern type based on the selection table (see FIGS. 40 (B) and 40 (C)) (step S2306), the value of the over winning counter acquired in step S2701 and the game in step S2306. Each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled based on the control order pattern type selected according to the set value. Then, the MPU 51 clears the value of the over winning counter (step S2703), sets the 7-segment display in-progress flag to on (step S2309), and ends the 7-segment display unit control process.

By the way, in order to save the number of launching game balls in the interval between round games in the jackpot game, there is a technique called stop striking in which the launch of the game balls in the interval is stopped. When such a stop hit is performed, the player repeatedly launches and stops launching the game ball while counting the number of game balls to be won in the variable winning opening 316 in the round game. Therefore, the player pays attention to the variable winning opening 316 with almost no confirmation of the symbol display unit 341 in the round game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when an over-winning occurs in a round game (excluding the final round) in the open / close execution mode, a ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in the next round game of the round game in which the over-winning occurs. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who makes a stop hit launch an extra game ball for generating an over prize, and it is possible to pay attention to the symbol display unit 341 in the round game. In particular, a player who makes a stop hit tends to emphasize the ball ejection performance as a criterion for selecting the game machine 10, so in order to pay attention to the symbol display unit 341, the game is set in the 7-segment display unit 39 by over winning. It is significant to display a part or all of the numerical values corresponding to the values.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a part or all of the numbers indicating the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by over winning, the Kroon device 37 and the game ball retention unit 38 in the above-mentioned first embodiment are displayed. Can be omitted. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost in this embodiment.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the special condition is established when a specific event occurs during the progress of the game, such as the over winning of the game ball 99 to the variable winning opening 316. A specific event occurs when a player receives a profit, for example, a profit exceeding the expected value of a profit normally obtained, or a jackpot is won. That is, the greater the profit earned by the player, the higher the possibility that a specific condition will be satisfied. The special conditions established in this way include the following, in addition to the over-winning of the game ball to the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot game.

(1) When the number of jackpot consecutive villas exceeds a predetermined number Since the jackpot game is to acquire the game ball 99 by entering the game ball into the variable winning opening 316, the player increases the number of jackpot consecutive villas. The profits that can be obtained will increase. Then, if a specific condition is satisfied when the number of jackpot consecutive villas exceeds a predetermined number of times, not only the expectation for the jackpot consecutive villa from the aspect of mere acquisition of balls, but also benefits such as information on game setting values and the like. You can enjoy the game, including the expectation that you will be able to guess or obtain recognizable information.
In this case, the predetermined number of times may be set as appropriate, but it may be determined based on, for example, the probability variation inrush rate or the probability variation continuation rate, and may be determined as the expected value of the number of jackpot consecutive villas. Specifically, the predetermined number of times includes the average number of jackpot consecutive villas regardless of the type of jackpot, and the average number of jackpot consecutive villas when the first hit is a probabilistic jackpot. In this embodiment, the probability variation jackpot distribution rate is 75%, and the normal jackpot distribution rate is 25% (see FIG. 14C). Therefore, the average number of jackpot consecutive villas regardless of the jackpot type (see FIG. 14C). The predetermined number of times (predetermined number of times) is 4, and the average number of times of jackpot consecutive villas (predetermined number of times) when the first hit is a probabilistic jackpot is 5 times.
Moreover, the predetermined number of times may be once. That is, a specific condition may be satisfied each time the jackpot villa continues.
Further, when the predetermined number of times is not once, the specific condition after the specific condition is first satisfied may be satisfied when the predetermined number of jackpot consecutive villas are continued, or may be specified first. It may be established when a specific number of times (for example, once) of jackpot consecutive villas different from the predetermined number of times when the condition of is satisfied continues.

(2) When the number of balls to be ejected in the jackpot consecutive villa exceeds the predetermined number of balls Since the jackpot game is to acquire the game ball 99 by entering the game ball into the variable winning opening 316, go to the variable winning opening 316. The greater the number of balls entered in the game, the greater the profit that the player can obtain. Then, if a specific condition is satisfied when the number of balls to be played in the jackpot consecutive villa exceeds a predetermined number, not only the expectation for the jackpot consecutive villa from the aspect of acquiring the balls, but also the game setting value. You can enjoy the game, including the expectation that you will be able to guess or obtain recognizable information such as information about profits.
In this case, the predetermined number of balls may be set as appropriate. For example, the probability variation inrush rate, the probability variation continuation rate, the number of rounds are distributed, the number of prize balls in the variable winning opening 316, and the upper limit number (count number) in which the variable winning opening 316 is closed. It is conceivable that it will be decided based on the above, and it will be decided as the expected value of the number of balls to be put out in the jackpot consecutive villa.
The expected value of the number of balls to be ejected in the jackpot consecutive villa may be either the expected value of the number of balls to be ejected regardless of the jackpot type or the expected value of the number of balls to be ejected when the first hit is a probabilistic jackpot.
In addition, instead of the number of balls to be played in the jackpot villa, a specific condition may be satisfied when the number of difference balls in the jackpot villa exceeds a predetermined number.

(3) When the number of balls ejected in the high probability mode exceeds the predetermined number In the high probability mode, not only is there a high probability that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit, but also whether or not the electric accessory 315b is operated. There is a high probability that the lottery result of the lottery will be a win. Therefore, in the high-probability mode, the electric accessory 315b is operated at a high frequency by hitting a normal figure, so that many game balls 99 can enter the second winning opening 315. Therefore, the longer the period of stay in the high-probability mode (the greater the number of lottery lottery per drawing), the greater the number of game balls 99 (balls) that can be obtained in the high-probability mode. On the other hand, players tend to dislike Hamari in the high-probability mode and want to win the jackpot lottery in the high-probability mode for a short period of stay. Then, if a specific condition is satisfied when the number of balls ejected in the high-probability mode exceeds the predetermined number of balls, profit information such as information on the game setting value is estimated or recognized by the hamari in the high-probability mode. The probability of getting possible information increases. Therefore, even a player who dislikes Hamari in the high probability mode can obtain a profit different from the acquisition of the game ball 99 by Hamari, so that the dislike of Hamari is alleviated.
In this case, the predetermined number of balls may be set as appropriate, but for example, the jackpot probability in the high probability mode (the average number of lottery between jackpots), the probability of hitting a normal figure, the number of prize balls of the second winning opening 315, the opening time, etc. It is determined based on the above, and the expected value of the ball output calculated from the average value of the number of jackpot lottery (the number of games between jackpots) required to win the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode can be mentioned.
However, a specific condition is set when the number of balls to be ejected in the high probability mode exceeds the predetermined number of balls when the game ball 99 is continuously launched without making full use of a special technique such as stop striking. , It is preferable to apply it when the expected ball output value calculated from the average value of the number of jackpot games is positive (when the number of balls is increased in the jackpot game). Typically, a small hit lottery that can acquire a small amount of game balls is performed in the high probability mode, and the game machine 10 that wins the small hit lottery with a high probability, or a small amount of games with a high probability in the big hit lottery. It is applied to the game machine 10 that wins a small hit in which a ball can be acquired. It is also conceivable that the small hit can be won with a limited high probability in the high probability mode that shifts after the end of the certain type of probability change big hit game such as 16R probability change big hit.
In addition, instead of the number of balls to be output in the high probability mode, a specific condition may be satisfied when the number of difference balls in the high probability mode exceeds a predetermined number of balls.
Further, in the game machine 10 that wins a small hit with a high probability in the high probability mode, a specific condition may be satisfied every time the number of small hits in the big hit inter-game reaches a predetermined number of times. The predetermined number of times in this case may be set as appropriate, but is determined based on, for example, the jackpot probability in the high probability mode (the average number of lottery between jackpots), the small hit probability, etc., and the average number of small hits in the high probability mode. Can be considered.

(4) When the combination of the main symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is a combination of specific symbols The lottery result in the jackpot lottery is notified or suggested by the combination of the main symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341. To. For example, in the present embodiment, the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined when getting doublet 7, and the probability variation jackpot of either 16R probability variation jackpot or 5R probability variation jackpot is determined when getting doublet 3, 3 and 7. In addition to getting doublet, any of 16R probability variable jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot and 5R normal jackpot is confirmed, and if it is not doublet, the deviation is confirmed. That is, since the combination of the main symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 suggests or clearly indicates the magnitude of the profit that the player can obtain, as a special condition, the combination of the main symbols that the player can obtain is large. (For example, 3 or 7 doublets) may be set to be stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first embodiment can be made within the applicable range.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the special out ball in the predetermined period is provided on the condition that the ball enters the variable winning opening 316 in the predetermined period and the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37. A case where a part or all of the numerical values corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by controlling the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the number has been described. ..

On the other hand, the present embodiment is common to the above-described first embodiment in that the game set value is suggested or specified on the condition that the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 during a predetermined period. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the game set value is suggested or specified as an alphabet on the 7-segment display unit 39. That is, the profit information such as the game set value set on the game hall side can be configured to be indirectly displayed by the alphabet or the like instead of being directly displayed by the numerical value.

Then, in the game machine of the present embodiment, the game set value is indirectly displayed by the alphabet, which makes it difficult for the player to guess or recognize the game set value as compared with the first embodiment described above. Becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing or recognizing the game set value at an early stage, and as a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 45 (A) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the alphabet displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 of the game machine according to the present embodiment and the game set value, and FIG. 45 (B) is the 7-segment display unit. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the lighting or extinguishing state of each segment, and the display alphabet. The values in parentheses to the right of the alphabet in FIG. 45 (B) indicate the game setting values.

As shown in FIG. 45 (A), when the number of over-winning game balls generated in the variable winning opening 316 during a predetermined period is 7 or more, and the game setting value is 1, segments A to C, E to When G is lit, the alphabet A is displayed, and when the game setting value is 2, all segments A to G are lit to display the alphabet B, and when the game setting value is 3, the segment is displayed. When A, D to F are lit, the alphabet C is displayed, and when the game setting value is 4, the alphabet D is displayed when the segments A to F are lit, and when the game setting value is 5. When the segments D to G are lit, the alphabet E is displayed, and when the game setting value is 6, the segments A and EG are lit to display the alphabet F.

As shown in FIG. 45 (B), the control state (power supply (lighting) or shutoff (off)) of each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 with respect to the alphabets A to F displayed as the game setting value is set. It shows. The player has an alphabet (game setting value) displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on whether the segments A to G to be controlled are in the lit state or the extinguished state according to the number of special out balls. It is possible to guess. For example, when power is supplied to segment A and segment A is turned on, it is one of the alphabets A to F (game setting values 1 to 6), and the power to segment A is cut off to cause segment A. Since there is no corresponding alphabet (game setting value) when the light is turned off, the alphabet (game setting value) cannot be determined from turning on or off by segment A alone. Similarly, in the case of segments E and F alone, the alphabet (game setting value) cannot be determined from lighting or extinguishing. On the other hand, when power is supplied to segment B and the segment B is turned on, it can be determined that it is one of the alphabets A, B and D (game setting values 1, 2 and 4), and the power to the segment B is determined. Is blocked and the segment B is turned off, so that it can be determined that the character is one of the alphabets C, E and F (game setting values 3, 5 and 6). Similarly, in the case of segments C, D and G alone, it is possible to infer (narrow down) the alphabet (game setting value) from lighting or extinguishing. Then, it is possible to more accurately determine the game setting value displayed as an alphabet depending on whether a plurality of segments A to G are lit or off, and the number of segments to be controlled is large. The game set value can be determined more accurately, and the game set value can be recognized by controlling all of at least seven segments A to G. Further, depending on the game set value and the control order, the game set value can be recognized before all the seven segments A to G are controlled.

In this way, even when the game setting value is displayed in alphabets on the 7-segment display unit 39, for example, a single game setting is performed as in the case where the game setting value is displayed by numbers as in the first embodiment described above. The ease of guessing the value itself and the ease of determining the level of the game setting value independently are different, and the ease of guessing the game setting value and its level in combination with other segments is different. Therefore, the ease of estimating the game setting value differs depending on the order in which each segment is controlled. Then, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the segments A to G are controlled in the order according to the pattern selected from the plurality of control order patterns predetermined for each game setting value. (See FIGS. 46 (A) and 46 (B)).

Here, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of a control order pattern type selection table used in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 39. Specifically, FIG. 46 (A) is a control order pattern type selection table when the game setting value is 1, and FIG. 46 (B) is a control order pattern type selection table when the game setting value is 1. Although the control order pattern type selection table for the game setting values 2 to 4 is omitted, as shown in FIGS. 46 (A) and 46 (B), seven control order pattern type selection tables are set for each game setting value. Has been done. This control order pattern type selection table is a table for determining the priority order of which of the segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39 is to be lit, and the control order pattern is controlled by the control order pattern type counter. Is stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (A), when the game setting value is 1, the control target up to the third stage is a combination of segments A, E, and F as in patterns A1 to F1. Even if the segments A, E, and F are lit, it cannot be determined whether the game setting value is any of 1 to 6.

Further, when the control target is the segment G and the segment G is lit in the fourth stage, that is, when the segments A, E, F, and G are lit, the alphabet F is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, it can be determined that the game set value is any of 1, 2, 5, and 6. Then, when the control target is segment D in the fifth stage, since segment D is not lit (because the off state is maintained), the game setting value can still be narrowed down from 1, 2, 5, and 6. Can not.

Further, when the control target is segment B or C and the segment B or C is lit in the sixth stage, the estimated alphabet is A or B, and it can be determined that the game set value is 1 or 2. .. Then, when the control target is segment B or C and the segment B or C is lit in the seventh stage, it can be recognized that the alphabet A is completed and the game set value is 1.

On the other hand, in the pattern G1 when the game setting value is 1, when the control target is the segment G and the segment G is lit in the first stage, it is one of the alphabets A, B, E, and F, so the game. It can be determined that the set value is one of 1, 2, 5, and 6. Further, when the segments A, E, and F are controlled and the segments A, E, and F are lit in the second to fourth stages, the game setting value can still be narrowed down from 1, 2, 5, and 6. Can not.

Then, when the control target is segment D in the fifth stage, since segment D is not lit (because the off state is maintained), the game setting value can still be narrowed down from 1, 2, 5, and 6. Can not. However, since there is no non-lit segment in the alphabet B, 2 is denied as the game setting value because it is not the alphabet B when the four segments A, E to G are lit in the fifth stage. Therefore, it can be determined that the game set value is any of 1, 5 and 6.

Further, when the control target is segment B or C and the segment B or C is lit in the sixth stage, 5 and 6 are denied as the game setting values because they are not the alphabets E and F, so 7 It can be recognized that the game set value is 1 before the segment of the stage becomes the control target.

As shown in FIG. 46 (B), when the game set value is 6, unlike the case where the game set value is 1, the priorities of the segments B, C, and D are in the same row. This is because the segments B, C, and D do not light up when they are controlled targets, so the game setting values are narrowed down regardless of the order in which the segments B, C, and D are controlled targets. Because it can be done.

By the way, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, a part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. However, when the game set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by a number, the player can easily guess the game set value, so that there is a concern that the interest in the game may be lowered at an early stage, and the game set value is low. There is a concern that the operating rate of the game machine 10 will decrease.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a part or all of the alphabet corresponding to the game set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, as compared with the case where a part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, it becomes more difficult for the player to guess the game set values, and the interest in the game is earlier. It is suppressed that the operating rate of the game machine 10 having a low game set value is reduced.

When the game setting value corresponds to the alphabet, it is not necessary to correspond to A to F, and it may correspond to another alphabet. Further, one game setting value may correspond to a plurality of alphabets. For example, in the case of the game setting value 1, the alphabets A and G may be associated with each other, and the game setting values 2 to 6 may be similarly selected from a plurality of alphabets. Further, instead of the alphabet, the game setting value may correspond to the symbol. Further, the game setting value may correspond to an alphabet and a number or a symbol. For example, when the game setting value is 1, it may be selected from either the number 1 or the alphabet A, and the game setting values 2 to 6 may be similarly selected from the corresponding alphabets and numbers. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first embodiment can be made to the extent applicable.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a special out in a predetermined period is provided on condition that the ball enters the variable winning opening 316 in a predetermined period and the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37. A case where a part or all of the numerical values corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by controlling the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the number of balls will be described. did.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the condition that the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth in the predetermined period, the game setting indicating the game setting value according to the game set value and the number of special out balls in the predetermined period. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the value display face image (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “face image”) is displayed on the symbol display unit. That is, the profit information regarding the game setting value and the like is not limited to the case where it is displayed on the 7-segment display unit, and may be displayed on a display device of another form such as a liquid crystal display device, and is composed of a plurality of parts. It can also be configured to be indirectly displayed as an image such as a face image.

Then, in the game machine of the present embodiment, the game set value is displayed as a face image on the symbol display unit, so that it is not necessary to provide the game set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the first embodiment described above. As a result, the effect of the above-described first embodiment can be enjoyed while simplifying the configuration of the game machine 10. Further, by indirectly displaying the game set value by the face image composed of a plurality of parts, the game set value is estimated or recognized by the player earlier than in the first embodiment described above. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 54, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Since this embodiment has the above-mentioned differences from the above-mentioned first embodiment, the display mode of the game setting value and the procedure of the game setting value display processing are different from the above-mentioned first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 47 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an ending screen in the jackpot game with the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 47 (A), in the present embodiment, on the ending screen in the normal jackpot game, the face image showing the game set value is displayed up to the step corresponding to the number of special out balls. In the present embodiment, the entire face image is displayed in step 7, and a part of the face image is displayed stepwise in steps 1 to 6 (see FIGS. 48 to 52). Here, a part or all of the face image is displayed on the ending screen of the normal jackpot game, as described in the first embodiment described above, usually at the end of a predetermined period in which the number of special out balls is retained. This is because it is rational to display a part or all of the face image on the ending screen of the normal jackpot when the setting is made at the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot.

Here, FIG. 47B is a diagram showing an example of the game set value display face image display order (correspondence between the number of special out balls and the display portion). As shown in FIG. 47 (B), the face image is displayed in seven stages of steps 1 to 7, the entire face image is displayed in step 7 as described above, and a part of the face image is displayed in steps 1 to 6. It is displayed in stages. Step 1 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in a predetermined period is one, and in step 1, the outline of the face image is displayed. Step 2 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in a predetermined period is two, and in step 2, the ears of the face image are displayed. Step 3 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in a predetermined period is three, and in step 3, the nose in the face image is displayed. Step 4 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in a predetermined period is 4, and in step 4, the mouth of the face image is displayed. Step 5 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in a predetermined period is 5, and in step 5, the hair (presence or absence of a hat) in the face image is displayed. Step 6 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in a predetermined period is 6, and in step 6, the eyebrows in the face image are displayed. Step 7 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in a predetermined period is 7 or more, and in step 7, the eyes of the face image are displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the parts of the face image are sequentially displayed in a fixed order according to the number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373. The display contents in steps 1 to 3 are common to all the game set values, and it is not possible to determine which of the game set values 1 to 6 is up to step 3. On the other hand, in steps 4 to 7, the face image parts are displayed with the display contents selected according to the game setting value among the plurality of display contents. Specifically, as described later, in step 4, the mouth is displayed as either open or closed, and in step 5, a face image with only hair added or a face image with a hat added with hair is displayed. It is displayed, and in step 6, it is displayed as either a raised eyebrow or a hanging eyebrow, and in step 7, it is displayed as either an open eye or a closed eye. In steps 4 to 7, the mouth, hair, eyebrows, and eyes are displayed as display contents selected from two types of display contents, but the selectable display contents may be other than the two types, and steps 4 to 7. It is not necessary that the number of display contents that can be selected in 4 to 7 is the same.

Here, FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the game set value and the face image. As shown in FIG. 48, 16 facial images A to P having the same contour, ears, and nose but different mouth, hair (with or without hat), eyebrows, and eyes are set, and the game is played. A plurality of face images are associated with each set value. Specifically, face images A to C are associated with the game setting value 1, face images D to F are associated with the game setting value 2, and face images G are associated with the game setting value 3. ~ I are associated with each other, face images J and K are associated with the game setting value 4, face images L and M are associated with the game setting value 5, and the game setting value 6 is associated with the face images L and M. Is associated with face images N to P.

Here, FIGS. 49 to 52 are diagrams showing an example of the display pattern of the face image.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 52, when the number of special out balls is one (step 1), an image showing the outline of the face is displayed on the ending screen of the normal jackpot of the symbol display unit 341. When the number of special out balls is two (step 2), an image showing the ears is displayed in addition to the image showing the outline of the face on the ending screen of the normal jackpot of the symbol display unit 341. When the number of special out balls is three (step 3), an image showing the nose is displayed in addition to the image showing the outline of the face and the ears on the ending screen of the normal jackpot of the symbol display unit 341. As described above, in steps 1 to 3, all 16 face images A to P are common.

When the number of special out balls is four (step 4), a face image in which a mouth is added to the image in step 3 is displayed. The mouth is displayed as either open or closed. In the case of the face image to which the open mouth is added in step 4 (see FIGS. 49 and 50), it is one of the face images A, B, D, I, J, L, N, O, and at this stage, the game It cannot be determined whether the set value is 1 to 6. On the other hand, in the case of the face image to which the closed mouth is added in step 4 (see FIGS. 51 and 52), it is any of the face images C, E, F, G, H, K, M, P, and this stage. It is not possible to determine which of 1 to 6 the game set value is.

When the number of special out balls is 5 (step 5), a face image in which only hair is added to the image in step 4 or a face image in which a hat is added together with hair is displayed. In the case of the face image to which only the hair is added in step 5, when the mouth is open (see FIG. 49), it is one of the face images A, B, L and N, and the game setting values 2, 3 and 4 are set. Since it is denied, it can be determined that the game setting value is either 1, 5 or 6. In the case of the face image to which only the hair is added in step 5, when the mouth is closed and open (see FIG. 51), it is one of the face images E, G, K and P, and the game setting values 1 and 5 are set. Since it is denied, it can be determined that the game setting value is any of 2 to 4 and 6. If the mouth is open in the case of the face image in which the hat is added together with the hair in step 5 (see FIG. 50), it is one of the face images D, J, M and O, and the game setting values 1 and 3 are negative. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is any of 2, 4 to 6. In the case of the face image in which the hat is added together with the hair in step 5, when the mouth is closed and open (see FIG. 52), it is one of the face images C, F, H and I, and the game setting values 4 to 6 Is denied, so it can be determined that the game setting value is one of 1 to 3.

When the number of special out balls is 6 (step 6), a face image in which eyebrows are added to the image in step 5 is displayed. The eyebrows are displayed as either hanging or hanging. In the case of the face image to which the raised eyebrows are added in step 6, when the mouth is open and the hat is not worn (see FIG. 49), it is either face image A or N, and the game setting value is 1 and It can be determined that it is any of 6. In the case of the face image to which the hanging eyebrows are added in step 6, when the mouth is open and the hat is not worn (see FIG. 49), the face images are either B or L, and the game setting values are 1 and 5. It can be judged that it is either. In the case of the face image to which the raised eyebrows are added in step 6, when the mouth is open and the hat is worn (see FIG. 50), the face images are either O or M, and the game setting values are 5 and It can be determined that it is any of 6. In the case of the face image to which the drooping eyebrows are added in step 6, when the mouth is open and the hat is worn (see FIG. 50), it is either face image D or J, and the game setting values are 2 and 4. It can be judged that it is either. In the case of the face image to which the raised eyebrows are added in step 6, when the mouth is closed and the hat is not worn (see FIG. 51), it is either face image E or P, and the game setting value is 2 and It can be determined that it is any of 6. In the case of the face image to which the hanging eyebrows are added in step 6, when the mouth is closed and the hat is not worn (see FIG. 51), the face images are either G or K, and the game setting values are 3 and 4. It can be judged that it is either. In the case of the face image to which the raised eyebrows are added in step 6, when the mouth is closed and the hat is worn (see FIG. 52), it is either face image C or H, and the game setting value is 1 and It can be determined that it is any of 3. In the case of the face image to which the hanging eyebrows are added in step 6, when the mouth is closed and the hat is worn (see FIG. 52), the face images are either F or I, and the game setting values are 2 and 3. It can be judged that it is either.

When the number of special out balls is 7 or more (step 7), a face image in which eyes are added to the image in step 6 is displayed. The eyes are displayed as either open or closed. Then, the face image is completed by adding the eyes, and it is possible to determine which of the face images A to P is. As a result, the player can recognize the game set value.

[Game setting value display processing]
In the present embodiment, in the game set value display process (step S2005) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is controlled as in the first embodiment described above. Further, in the present embodiment, control is executed in which a part or all of the face image indicating the game set value is displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the normal jackpot. Here, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value display process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 53, in the game set value display process of the present embodiment, steps S2201 to S2212 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, so that the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is moved up and down. The movement is controlled. Further, in step S2801, a face image display process is executed in which a part or all of the face image indicating the game set value is displayed. Hereinafter, the face image display process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 54.

[Face image display processing]
Here, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the face image display process executed in the game setting value display process of FIG. 53.

<Step S2901>
As shown in FIG. 54, in step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the face image display flag is set to ON. The face image display flag is a flag indicating that a part or all of the face image is displayed, and is set to on in step S2909 described later. Here, the MPU 51 ends the face image display process when the face image display flag is set to on (step S2901: Yes), and the face image display flag is set to off (step S2901: Yes). S2901: No), the process proceeds to step S2902.

<Steps S2902 and S2903>
In step S2902, the MPU 51 acquires the value of the special out-ball counter added in step S2209 of FIG. 38 and stored in the RAM 512, and determines whether or not the value of the special out-ball counter is 0 (step S2903). ). The value of the special out ball counter is the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37 by winning a prize in the variable winning opening 316 during a predetermined period (the period from the start of the jackpot game of the first hit to the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the normal jackpot). It is the number of special out balls that have entered the ball. Then, when the value of the special out-ball counter is 0 (step S2903: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the face image display process. On the other hand, when the value of the special out-ball counter is not 0 (step S2903: No), the process proceeds to step S2904.

<Steps S2904 to S2906>
In step S2904, the MPU 51 calculates the number of face image display steps based on the value of the special out ball counter (the number of special out balls) acquired in step S2902. That is, the MPU 51 determines to what stage the face image is displayed. Then, the MPU 51 acquires the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 (step S2905), and selects the face image type based on the game setting value (step S2906). Specifically, the MPU 51 selects a face image from the face images A to C when the game setting value is 1, and selects a face image from the face images D to F when the game setting value is 2, and sets the game. When the value is 3, the face image is selected from the face images G to I, when the game setting value is 4, the face image is selected from the face images J and K, and when the game setting value is 5, the face image L and A face image is selected from M, and when the game setting value is 6, a face image is selected from face images N to P (see FIG. 48).

<Steps S2907 to 2309>
In step S2907, the MPU 51 transmits a face image display command indicating the face image type determined in step S2906 and the number of face image display steps calculated in step S2904 to the display control device 6. As a result, the display control device 6 displays a part or all of the face image up to the stage corresponding to the number of face image display steps calculated in step S2904 on the ending screen of the normal jackpot displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Let me. Then, the MPU 51 clears the value of the special out-ball counter stored in the RAM 512 (step S2908), sets the face image display flag to off (step S2909), and ends the face image display process.

By the way, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, a part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. However, when the game set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by a number, the player can easily guess the game set value, so that there is a concern that the interest in the game may be lowered at an early stage, and the game set value is low. There is a concern that the operating rate of the game machine 10 will decrease.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a part or all of the face image corresponding to the game set value is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, as compared with the case where a part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, it becomes more difficult for the player to guess the game set values, and the interest in the game is earlier. It is suppressed that the operating rate of the game machine 10 having a low game set value is reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the face image showing the game set value is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, it is not necessary to separately provide the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost as compared with the case where the 7-segment display unit 39 is provided, and the control becomes easier as compared with the case where the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled.

In the present embodiment, a part or all of the face image showing the game set value is displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending of the normal jackpot game, but the image showing the game set value. Is not limited to the face image and may be another image. For example, the game setting value may be indicated by an image such as a whole body image, an animal, a symbol, a symbol string, a character, a character string, a number, or a number string. For example, the game set value may be indicated by a numerical image as shown in FIG. 55, or the game set value may be indicated by an alphabet image as shown in FIG. 56.

In the example shown in FIG. 55, instead of displaying the number indicating the game setting value on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the first embodiment described above, a part or all of the number image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen. Is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 56, instead of displaying the alphabet indicating the game setting value on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the third embodiment described above, a part or all of the alphabet image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen. Is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, on the condition that the game ball winning in the variable winning opening 316 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the Kroon device 37, the symbol display unit 341 displays up to the stage corresponding to the number of winning balls. A part or all of the face image showing the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen to be displayed, provided that an over-winning occurs at the variable winning opening 316 as in the third embodiment described above. , A part or all of the face image showing the game setting value may be displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 up to the stage according to the number of over prizes.

Further, to the extent applicable, it is possible to make design changes similar to the design changes in the first embodiment described above.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the special out ball in the predetermined period is provided on the condition that the ball enters the variable winning opening 316 in the predetermined period and the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37. A case where a part or all of the numerical values corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by controlling the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the number has been described. ..

Further, on condition that the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 during the predetermined period, a face image showing the game set value is displayed on the symbol display unit according to the game set value and the number of special out balls in the predetermined period. The case where it is displayed in 341 has been described.

On the other hand, the present embodiment is displayed on the symbol display unit according to the game set value and the number of special out balls in the predetermined period, provided that the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 in the predetermined period. The game setting value is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the number of game setting value display images that can be estimated or recognized is reduced. That is, the profit information such as the information about the game setting value is not limited to the case where the display content is displayed by the method of increasing (adding), but the display content (candidate of the game setting value) is reduced (deleted). It may be displayed.

Then, in the game machine of the present embodiment, since the game set value is displayed on the symbol display unit, it is not necessary to provide it on the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the first embodiment described above. As a result, the effects of the above-mentioned first embodiment can be enjoyed while simplifying the configuration of the game machine as in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment. Further, when the game setting value is displayed by a method in which the display content (candidate for the game setting value) is reduced (deleted), the control of the image display on the symbol display unit is simplified as compared with the fourth embodiment described above. There is an advantage that it is done.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Since this embodiment has the above-mentioned differences from the above-mentioned first embodiment, the display mode of the game setting value and the procedure of the game setting value display processing are different from the above-mentioned first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 57A is a diagram showing an ending screen in a normal jackpot game with the game machine according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 57 (A), in the present embodiment, the game setting value image of the step corresponding to the game setting value and the number of special out balls is displayed on the ending screen in the normal jackpot game. In the present embodiment, a game setting value image capable of recognizing the game setting value is displayed in step 6 having 5 special out balls, and a game setting value in steps 1 to 5 having 0 to 4 special out balls. The game setting value image that can be guessed is displayed step by step, and the larger the number of steps (the number of special out balls), the easier it is to guess the game setting value (see FIG. 58).

Specifically, the game setting value image is divided into six areas, and in step 1 (the number of special out balls is 0), a marine life image corresponding to the game setting value is displayed in each area. In addition, a number is attached to each marine life image, and this number corresponds to the game setting value. Specifically, the marine life image corresponding to the game setting value of 1 is an octopus displayed in the upper left region. The marine life image corresponding to the game setting value of 2 is the Harisenbon displayed in the middle and upper regions. The marine life image corresponding to the game setting value of 3 is the turtle displayed in the upper right area. The marine life image corresponding to the game setting value of 4 is a shark displayed in the lower left area. The marine life image corresponding to the game setting value of 5 is the shrimp displayed in the middle and lower regions. The marine life image corresponding to the game setting value of 6 is the angler fish displayed in the lower right area.

Further, as the game set value image, it is difficult to visually recognize the marine life image of the number of regions corresponding to the number of special out balls (see FIG. 58). For example, when the number of special out balls is 0 (step 1), all six marine life images are easily visible. On the other hand, when the number of special out balls is one (step 2), one marine life image is difficult to see (five marine life images are easy to see), and the actual setting is made from the five game setting values. You will guess the value. When the number of special out balls is two (step 3), it is difficult to see two marine life images (four marine life images are easy to see), and the actual setting value is estimated from the four game setting values. become. When the number of special out balls is three (step 4), it is difficult to see three marine life images (three marine life images are easy to see), and the actual setting value is estimated from the three game setting values. become. When the number of special out balls is four (step 5), it is difficult to see four marine life images (two marine life images are easy to see), and the actual setting value is estimated from the two game setting values. become. When the number of special out balls is five (step 6), the five marine life images are difficult to see (one marine life image is easy to see), and the game setting value can be recognized.

Here, FIG. 57B is a diagram showing an example of an image erasing order (correspondence between the number of steps (the number of special out balls) and the erased image (an image that is difficult to see)).

As shown in FIG. 57 (B), the image erasing order is defined for each game set value, and the marine organism image corresponding to the game set value is not targeted for erasure. The marine life image finally erased in step 6 is the marine life image having the highest game setting value. That is, the marine life image that is finally erased at the game setting values 1 to 5 is an octopus corresponding to the game setting value 6, and the marine life image that is finally erased at the game setting value 6 is set to the game setting value 5. The corresponding octopus. As a result, the marine life image corresponding to the maximum set value can be left in the process up to the final step 6, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the game set value of the game machine 10 is the maximum set value. Can be enjoyed.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B), for example, in the case of step 1 in which the number of special out balls is 0, all (6) marine life images are displayed as the game setting value images. It becomes a thing. In step 2 where the number of special out balls is 1, when the game setting value is 1, the turtle corresponding to the game setting value 3 is difficult to see, so that the game setting value 3 is denied and the game setting value is 1. It can be determined that it is any of 2, 4 to 6, and when the game setting value is 6, the harisenbon corresponding to the game setting value 2 is difficult to see, so that the game setting value 2 is denied and the game setting value 2 is denied. Can be determined to be any of 1, 3 to 6. In the case of step 3 where the number of special out balls is 2, when the game setting value is 1, the shark corresponding to the game setting value 4 is made difficult to see, so that the game setting value 4 is further denied and the game setting value becomes It can be determined that the value is 1, 2, 5 or 6, and when the game setting value is 6, the turtle corresponding to the game setting value 3 is difficult to see, so that the game setting value 3 is further denied and the game is played. It can be determined that the set value is any of 1, 4 to 6. In the case of step 4 where the number of special out balls is 3, when the game setting value is 1, the harisenbon corresponding to the game setting value 2 is made difficult to see, so that the game setting value 2 is further denied and the game setting value becomes It can be determined that it is one of 1, 5 and 6, and when the game setting value is 6, the shark corresponding to the game setting value 4 is made difficult to see, so that the game setting value 4 is further denied and the game setting value 4 is further denied. Can be determined to be any of 1, 5 and 6. In the case of step 5 where the number of special out balls is 4, when the game setting value is 1, the shrimp corresponding to the game setting value 5 is difficult to see, so that the game setting value 5 is further denied and the game setting value becomes It can be determined that it is either 1 or 6, and when the game setting value is 6, the shrimp corresponding to the game setting value 5 is difficult to see, so that the game setting value 5 is further denied and the game setting value is 1. And 6 can be determined. In step 6 where the number of special out balls is 5 or more, when the game setting value is 1, the angler fish corresponding to the game setting value 6 is made difficult to see, so that the game setting value 6 is further denied and the game setting value is further denied. Is recognized as 1, and when the game setting value is 6, the octopus corresponding to the game setting value 1 is difficult to see, so that the game setting value 6 is further denied and the game setting value is recognized as 1. it can.

[Game setting value display processing]
In the present embodiment, in the game set value display process (step S2005) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is controlled as in the first embodiment described above. Further, in the present embodiment, control is executed in which a part or all of the game setting value image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the normal jackpot. Here, FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value display process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 59, in the game set value display process of the present embodiment, steps S2201 to S2212 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, so that the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is moved up and down. The movement is controlled. Further, in step S3001, a game setting value image display process for displaying a game setting value image indicating the game setting value is executed. Hereinafter, the game set value image display process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60.

[Game setting value image display processing]
Here, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the game setting value image display processing executed in the game setting value display processing of FIG. 59.

<Step S3101>
As shown in FIG. 60, in step S3101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game setting value image display flag is set to ON. The game setting value image display flag is a flag indicating that the game setting value image is displayed, and is set to on in step S3109 described later. Here, when the set image display flag is set to on (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game setting value image display process, and the game setting value image display flag is set to off. If so (step S3101: No), the process proceeds to step S3102.

<Steps S3102 and S3103>
In step S3102, the MPU 51 acquires the value of the special out-ball counter added in step S2209 of FIG. 38 and stored in the RAM 512, and determines whether or not the value of the special out-ball counter is 0 (step S3103). ). The value of the special out ball counter is the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37 by winning a prize in the variable winning opening 316 during a predetermined period (the period from the start of the jackpot game of the first hit to the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the normal jackpot). It is the number of special out balls that have entered the ball. Then, when the value of the special out-ball counter is 0 (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game set value image display process. On the other hand, when the value of the special out-ball counter is not 0 (step S3103: No), the process proceeds to step S3104.

<Steps S3104 to S3106>
In step S3104, the MPU 51 calculates a number (number of steps) that makes the marine life image difficult to see based on the value of the special out ball counter (number of special out balls) acquired in step S3102. Then, the MPU 51 acquires the game set value stored in the RAM 512 (step S3105), and selects the image erasure order based on the image erasure order table (see FIG. 57 (B)) according to the game set value (see FIG. 57 (B)). Step S3106). Specifically, the MPU 51 selects "no erasure"->"turtle"->"turtle"->"harisenbon"->"shrimp"->"ankou" as the image erasure order when the game setting value is 1, and the game If the setting value is 2, select "No erasure" → "Turtle" → "Turtle" → "Shrimp" → "Taco" → "Ankou", and if the game setting value is 3, "No erasure" → "Harisenbon" Select "Shrimp"->"Shrimp"->"Shrimp"->"Ankou", and when the game setting value is 4, "No erasure"->"Harisenbon"->"Turtle"->"Shrimp"->"Turtle"-> Select "Ankou", and when the game setting value is 5, select "No erasure"->"Harisenbon"->"Turtle"->"Shrimp"->"Taco"->"Ankou", and when the game setting value is 6. Select "No erasure"->"Harisenbon"->"Turtle"->"Turtle"->"Taco"->"Shrimp".

<Steps S3107 to 2309>
In step S3107, the MPU 51 transmits to the display control device 6 a game setting value image display command indicating the image erasing order determined in step S3106 and the number of steps calculated in step S3104. As a result, the display control device 6 displays the game set value image in which the marine life image is difficult to see up to the stage corresponding to the number of steps calculated in step S3104 on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341. .. Then, the MPU 51 clears the value of the special out-ball counter stored in the RAM 512 (step S3108), sets the game setting value image display flag to off (step S3109), and ends the game setting value image display process. To do.

By the way, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, a part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. However, when the game set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by a number, the 7-segment display unit 39 for displaying the number corresponding to the game set value is required.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a part or all of a plurality of marine life images corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost as compared with the case where the 7-segment display unit 39 is provided, and the control becomes easier as compared with the case where the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled.

In the present embodiment, a game setting value image with numbers is displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending of the normal jackpot game, but the game setting value image is the one in which the numbers are omitted. It may be an alphabet, a symbol, or the like instead of a number.

Further, in the present embodiment, on the condition that the game ball winning in the variable winning opening 316 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the crune device 37, the symbol display unit 341 displays the ball up to the stage corresponding to the number of winning balls. An image of a marine organism showing a game setting value is displayed on the ending screen, but the number of over-winnings is provided on the condition that over-winning occurs at the variable winning opening 316 as in the third embodiment described above. A number of marine life images corresponding to the above may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Further, to the extent applicable, it is possible to make design changes similar to the design changes in the first embodiment described above.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the special out ball in the predetermined period is provided on the condition that the ball enters the variable winning opening 316 in the predetermined period and the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kroon device 37. A case where a part or all of the numerical values corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by controlling the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the number has been described. ..

Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, the game is set according to the game set value and the number of special out balls in the predetermined period, provided that the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 in the predetermined period. The case where the game setting value display face image indicating the value is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the condition that the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 in the predetermined period, the expected ball output value is set according to the expected ball output value and the number of special out balls in the predetermined period. It is different from the above-described first and fourth embodiments in that the expected ball output value face image (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “face image”) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. That is, the profit information displayed on the display device such as the symbol display unit is not limited to the information related to the game set value, but may be other information such as the information related to the expected ball output value.

Then, in the game machine of the present embodiment, the information on the expected ball output value is displayed on the symbol display unit, so that the information on the game set value is displayed as in the first embodiment described above. In addition to the ball ejection performance based on the game set value, the ball ejection performance in consideration of the state of the nails placed on the game board 31 and the surface properties of the game board 31 can be comprehensively evaluated. As a result, while enjoying the enjoyment of estimating the game set value, it is possible to estimate and enjoy the overall ball ejection performance of the game machine 10. Further, since the game set value cannot be recognized, it is suppressed that the interest in the game is lowered at an early stage, and the operating rate of the game machine 10 having a low game set value is suppressed.

Here, the expected ball output value is, for example, the expected number of balls to be ejected (paid out game balls) with respect to the total number of launched game balls (total number of out balls) when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are launched. Number). The expected payout value is 100% when the total number of launched game balls (total number of out balls) and the expected number of payout balls (payout game balls) are the same, and the expected number of payout balls (payout game). It is more than 100% when the number of balls is larger, and less than 100% when the expected number of balls to be paid out (number of game balls to be paid out) is smaller. That is, when the expected value of ball ejection exceeds 100%, it is advantageous for the player, and the higher the value, the higher the ball ejection performance. On the other hand, when the expected value of ball ejection is less than 100%, it is disadvantageous to the player, and the lower the value, the lower the ball ejection performance.

In addition, the expected number of balls to be paid out (number of payout game balls) is a normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), a short game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a probabilistic game state (high probability mode). It can be calculated from the theoretical ratio of the probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the jackpot game state, and the theoretical number of balls to be played in each game state. Here, the theoretical ratio of each game state is, for example, a game setting value (big hit probability in low probability mode and high probability mode (see FIGS. 7 (A) and 7 (B))), a distribution rate of each big hit type ( (See FIG. 7 (C)), calculated based on the number of unit jackpot lottery, bonus ratio, and the like. In addition, the number of balls to be paid out (number of game balls to be paid out) expected in the normal game state is calculated based on, for example, the number of unit jackpot lottery, the base, and the like. The expected number of balls (number of payout game balls) other than the normal game state (short-time game state, probabilistic game state, and jackpot game state) is, for example, the theoretical average number of consecutive villas for the first hit and the distribution rate of the jackpot type (Fig.). 7 (C)), calculated based on the theoretical difference number of balls for each jackpot type, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the expected ball output values are classified into six ranks S and A to E. Rank S has an expected payout value of 120% or more, rank A has an expected payout value of 110% or more and less than 120%, rank B has an expected payout value of 110% or more and less than 120%, and rank C. The expected ball output value is 110% or more and less than 120%, the expected ball output value is 110% or more and less than 120% in rank D, and the expected ball output value is less than 80% in rank E.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Since this embodiment has the above-mentioned differences from the above-mentioned first and fourth embodiments, the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt processing, the game setting value display mode, and the game setting value display processing is described above. It is different from the first embodiment.

In the present embodiment, on the ending screen of the normal jackpot game, the face image showing the game setting value is displayed up to the step corresponding to the number of special out balls. In the present embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the entire face image is displayed in step 7, and a part of the face image is displayed stepwise in steps 1 to 6 (see FIGS. 48 to 52). ). Here, FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the expected ball ejection value and the expected ball ejection value face image in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 61, there are 16 face images A to P as in the fourth embodiment described above. When the expected ball ejection value is rank S, one of the face images A to C is selected, and when the expected ball ejection value is rank A, any of the face images D to F is selected, and the expected ball ejection value is selected. If is rank B, one of the face images G to I is selected, if the expected ball ejection value is rank C, the face image J or K is selected, and if the expected ball ejection value is rank D, the face image J or K is selected. When the face image L or M is selected and the expected ball output value is rank E, any of the face images N to P is selected.

[Secondary timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device. As shown in FIG. 62, in the game setting value display process (step S2005) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the counter update process (step S2001) and the command determination are performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above. The process (step S2002), the variable game effect process (step S2003), and the jackpot game effect process (step S2004) are executed. Further, in the sub-timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the expected ball output value display process is executed instead of the game set value display process (step S2005). Hereinafter, the expected ball output value display process will be described with reference to FIG. 63.

[Expected value display processing]
In the present embodiment, in the game set value display process (step S2005) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is controlled as in the first embodiment described above. Further, in the present embodiment, control is executed in which a part or all of the game setting value display face image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the normal jackpot. Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value display process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 62.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the game set value display process of the present embodiment, steps S2201 to S2212 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, so that the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is moved up and down. The movement is controlled. Further, in step S3201, the MPU 51 executes a face image display process of displaying the ball ejection set value image indicating the ball ejection expected value up to a predetermined step. Hereinafter, the face image display process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 64.

[Face image display processing]
Here, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the face image display process executed in the game setting value display process of FIG. 63. As shown in FIG. 64, the face image display process of the present embodiment is the same as the face image display process of the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 54), but the processes of steps S3301 and S3302 are described above. This is different from the face image display processing in the fourth embodiment.

<Steps S3301 and S3302>
In the face image display process of the present embodiment, when the face image is not displayed after the end of the open / close execution mode (step S2901: No), the face image display step is calculated based on the value of the special out-ball counter (step S2901: No). Steps S2901 to S2904). Then, the MPU 51 calculates the expected ball output value in step S3301. As described above, the expected payout value is calculated from, for example, the game set value, as well as the base information, the continuous bonus ratio information, the bonus ratio information, the cumulative jackpot lottery count, and the like. Further, the MPU 51 selects a face image type to be displayed on the ending screen based on the rank of the expected ball output value (step S3302). Further, the MPU 51 transmits a face image display command for displaying the face image on the symbol display unit 341 to the display control device 6, clears the value of the special out-ball counter, and sets the face image display flag to on. (Steps S2907 to S2909), the face image display process is terminated.

By the way, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, a part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. However, when the game set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by a number, the player can easily guess the game set value, so that there is a concern that the interest in the game may be lowered at an early stage, and the game set value is low. There is a concern that the operating rate of the game machine 10 will decrease.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a part or all of the face image corresponding to the expected ball output value is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. This expected ball output value is an index that reflects the game set value, but does not indicate the game set value itself. Therefore, compared to the case where a part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game set value are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, when displaying a part or all of the face image showing the expected ball output value, the game is played. Since the set value cannot be recognized, it is suppressed that the interest in the game is lowered at an early stage, and the operating rate of the game machine 10 having a low game set value is suppressed.

Further, by displaying a part or all of the face image corresponding to the expected ball ejection value on the symbol display unit 341, in addition to the ball ejection performance based on the game set value, the nail placed on the game board 31 It is possible to evaluate the ball ejection performance in consideration of the state and the surface texture of the game board 31. As a result, while enjoying the enjoyment of estimating the game set value, it is possible to estimate and enjoy the overall ball ejection performance of the game machine 10.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the face image showing the game set value is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, it is not necessary to separately provide the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost as compared with the case where the 7-segment display unit 39 is provided, and the control becomes easier as compared with the case where the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled.

In the present embodiment, a part or all of the face image showing the expected ball output value is displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending of the normal jackpot game, but the expected ball output value is displayed. The image shown is not limited to the face image and may be another image. For example, the game setting value may be indicated by an image such as a whole body image, an animal, a number, a symbol, a character string, or a number string.

Further, the expected ball output value may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the first embodiment described above. In this case, for example, an alphabet or a number indicating the rank of the expected ball output value may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, or a plurality of 7-segment display units 39 may be arranged side by side on the plurality of 7-segment display units 39. The numerical value of the expected value may be displayed.

In addition, the expected ball output value may be evaluated as a sufficiency rate with respect to the borderline. Here, the borderline is the number of jackpot lottery required for the ball rental per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in order to set the expected ball output value to 100%, and this borderline is the jackpot lottery probability. The calculation is performed on the assumption that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit. That is, the borderline is the number of jackpot lottery per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in which the difference is ± 0 when the jackpot is won according to the theoretical probability. In addition, various methods for calculating the borderline have been proposed. For example, the borderline can be calculated as the number of balls lent for 1000 yen / (average number of balls to be played in a jackpot game / total probability). Here, the number of balls rented per 1000 yen is generally 250 balls. Further, the average number of balls to be played in the jackpot game is the number of balls to be played per jackpot game when the number of round games in the jackpot game is distributed according to the theoretical value. The total probability is the average jackpot winning probability when the high probability mode and the low probability mode are distributed according to the theoretical value. Then, the sufficiency rate for the borderline is calculated as the ratio between the number of unit jackpot lottery and the borderline. When the sufficiency rate of this borderline exceeds 100%, the larger the value, the more advantageous to the player, and when it is less than 100%, the smaller the value, the more disadvantageous to the player. For example, when the number of unit jackpot lottery is 18 and the borderline is 20, the sufficiency rate for the borderline is 90%, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, on the condition that the game ball winning in the variable winning opening 316 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the Kroon device 37, the symbol display unit 341 displays up to the stage corresponding to the number of winning balls. A part or all of the face image showing the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen to be displayed, provided that an over-winning occurs at the variable winning opening 316 as in the third embodiment described above. , A part or all of the face image showing the game setting value may be displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 up to the stage according to the number of over prizes.

Further, to the extent applicable, it is possible to make design changes similar to the design changes in the first embodiment described above.

Further, in the first to sixth embodiments, the case where the profit information regarding the game set value, the expected ball output value, and the like is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period has been described, but the profit state is displayed. As a specific condition for this, the design change described below is also possible.

For example, as a specific condition, a player participation type condition can be set. Specifically, for example, the player is made to predict an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses, and when the player's prediction is correct, the player is provided with information that enables the estimation or recognition of profit information. It is also possible to provide it.

Here, as an event that can occur in the future as the game progresses, from a specific starting point (for example, a variable game expected by the player, an opening of a jackpot game, a specific round game, a specific interval, an ending) to a jackpot. The number of jackpot lottery (number of games) required to win, the jackpot type (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot) when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery after a specific starting point, and stop display at the time of jackpot Types of main symbols (for example, 1 to 9) and production types in games executed at specific timings can be mentioned.

When the player is made to predict the number of big hit lottery required to win the big hit, it is difficult to hit the prediction pinpointly. Therefore, for example, the number of big hit lottery is 50 times or less, more than 50 times to 100 times. It is conceivable to make predictions from a plurality of groups, such as within, over 100 times, and within 150 times.

Further, as the prediction form of the production type, for example, the prediction of the final individual production type of the variable game production (whether it is a non-reach production, a normal reach production, a super reach production or a special reach production), or a reach production is executed. Prediction of the final reach production type (normal reach production, super reach production or special reach production) in the case, notice production type (step-up production, rank-up production, cut-in production) when the notice production is executed And the type of production such as the prediction of (which is the dialogue production). Further, the prediction form of the production type is not limited to the variable game production, and may be the prediction of the production type in the jackpot game production. For example, the prediction of the opening effect type executed in the opening, the prediction of the round game effect type executed in a specific round game, the ending effect type executed in the ending, and the like can be considered.

Further, the provision of the information capable of estimating or recognizing the profit information to the player is, for example, as described above in the first to sixth embodiments, the display devices such as the 7-segment display unit 39 and the symbol display unit 341. Can be adopted.

Further, when the player's prediction is correct, the information desired by the player may be provided from a plurality of available information. For example, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is used to provide the player with information that enables the estimation or recognition of profit information, the segments A to G to be controlled when the player's prediction is correct. It is also conceivable to let the player select. For the selection of the segments A to G to be controlled, for example, a touch panel is provided on the front surface of the symbol display unit 341, and when the player's prediction is correct, the segments A to G to be controlled can be selected on the symbol display unit 341. It can be realized based on the operation of the touch panel by the player by displaying various images. Further, when displaying an image in which the segments A to G to be controlled can be selected on the symbol display unit 341, the segments A to G to be controlled are displayed by operating the operation unit such as the cross key provided on the upper plate 23 or the like. It may be selectable.

If the information desired by the player is provided from a plurality of pieces of information when the prediction is correct, the player can determine the level of the game setting value, which is the most advantageous game setting value for the player. Information that can determine the presence or absence of the possibility of 6 and information that denies a specific game setting value such as the most disadvantageous game setting value 1 for the player can be selected. For example, when the game setting value is displayed by a number on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is possible to determine whether the game setting value is 5 or 6 or the game setting value 1 to 4 by selecting the segment B. .. Specifically, when segment B is selected and lit, it can be determined that the game setting values are 1 to 4, and when it is not lit, it can be determined that the game setting value is 5 or 6 (see FIG. 40 (A)). ). Further, when the segment G is selected, it is possible to determine whether or not to deny the game set value 1 (see FIG. 40 (A)). Then, if the forecast is correct and then the forecast is correct again, or if new information that has not been selected is selected, the accuracy of estimating profit information is improved by combining with the information that is still obtained. , Or the possibility of recognizing profit information increases. This can provide motivation for the continuation of the game for the purpose of obtaining new information by hitting the prediction. In addition, since the player can obtain the desired information by his / her own judgment, he / she decides the desired information based on his / her own criteria as to whether or not to continue the game, and decides whether or not to continue the game. Can be done early.

In this way, if the player is made to predict an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses and the player's prediction is correct as a specific condition, the player can make a prediction in the variable game or the jackpot game. You can enjoy whether or not you hit the mark. In addition, compared to the case where profit information such as information on game setting values can be passively estimated or recognized as the game progresses, the consciousness of participation in the game is improved, and the process of estimating or recognizing profit information is performed. You can enjoy it even more.

In addition, a plurality of events may be predicted, and information on the number or content according to the number of events for which the prediction is correct may be provided to the player, and information on the number or content according to the degree of difficulty of prediction may be provided to the player. You may. In this case, depending on the accuracy of the prediction, it is possible to obtain a plurality of information necessary for estimating or recognizing the game set value or information capable of estimating the game set value with high accuracy at a time. Therefore, the importance of hitting the prediction is increased, and it is necessary to predict the event that may occur in the future as the game progresses to the player, and to confirm whether or not the prediction is correct. Can be enjoyed even more.

In addition, when the player is made to predict from a plurality of options, odds may be given to each option. The odds are set according to, for example, the difficulty of occurrence of the event included in the options. Specifically, for example, when predicting the final reach production type in a variable game production, the odds for the normal reach production are "1", the odds for the super reach production are "2", and the odds for the special reach production are "3". The odds of each option are set as follows. As a result, the player can grasp the difficulty of occurrence of the event to be predicted by referring to the odds, and can enjoy the prediction by referring to the odds. Then, when the player's prediction is correct when giving odds to each option, it is also possible to give information corresponding to the odds. For example, when the player is provided with information that enables the estimation or recognition of profit information by using the 7-segment display unit 39, the number of segments A to G according to the odds should be controlled to be turned on or off. Is also possible. Specifically, if the player predicts and hits an option with odds of 1, one segment becomes the control target, and if the player predicts and hits an option with odds of 2, 2 One segment is the control target, and if the player predicts and hits the option with odds of 3, the three segments are the control target. By providing information in response to the odds in this way, the player may have a small amount of information, so a high hit rate option for safety, and a risk-aware hit in order to obtain a large amount of information. Players can enjoy selecting from low-rate options and intermediate hit-rate options with an intermediate amount of information without taking safety measures or dangerous measures according to their own tastes and situations.

Further, when the player predicts an event that may occur in the future, the game machine 10 is configured so that the event to be predicted is determined as usual without considering the player's prediction. .. That is, the game machine 10 does not arbitrarily determine the result of the event to be predicted so as to be unexpectedly wrong, and conversely, determines the result of the event to be predicted so as to be arbitrarily predicted. There is no such thing. Of course, the game machine 10 may adopt a configuration in which the prediction is arbitrarily removed or the prediction is guessed.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, there is one in which a player can select a game mode from a plurality of effect groups with respect to an effect group executed in a variable game. For example, a game machine that can select a production mode from a plurality of production modes having different jackpot expectations (reliability) and selection rate (including 0%) for specific effects such as special reach, jackpot confirmation effect, and look-ahead advance notice effect. There are game machines that can select the production mode from a plurality of production modes in which the main character and the characters appearing in the game production are different. In this type of gaming machine, when the effect type is set as an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses, if the effect mode is changed after the effect type is predicted, the player changes the effect mode to the changed effect mode. It is assumed that the expected effect does not exist, and that the selection rate of the effect selected by the player differs before and after the effect mode is changed. This problem can be solved by, for example, reselecting the effect type when the effect mode is changed. Further, when there is a common individual effect type in a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to respond to the change of the effect mode by setting only such a common individual effect as an option. In addition, the modes of the plurality of production modes are associated with each other by the production type, and when the production mode is changed, the production mode after the change corresponding to the production selected in the production mode before the change is used. It is also possible to deal with it as if the production was selected. In this case, it is preferable to notify the player which effect the effect selected in the effect mode before the change corresponds to in the effect mode after the change.

Further, as another example of the specific condition of the player participation type, it is considered that the number of times the operation request of the operation button 20 for executing the operation effect on the game machine 10 is made to the player reaches a predetermined number of times. Be done. It is also conceivable to set a specific condition that the number of times the operation button 20 is operated by the player reaches a predetermined number of times among the number of times the operation request of the operation button 20 is made to the player. As a result, when there is an operation request for executing the operation effect, the player can be motivated to operate the operation button 20, so that the operation button 20 is not operated and the operation effect is not executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

Further, when the game machine 10 is other than the loop probability change machine, it is possible to set specific conditions corresponding to the type of the game machine 10. For example, in the game machine 10 configured as the case of the ST machine or the V-ST machine, it can be assumed that a specific condition is satisfied when the big hit lottery is won in a specific period during ST. It is conceivable to set the specific period to, for example, a period in which there are many STs remaining at the time of winning the jackpot (for example, 50% or less, 40% or less, 30% or less, 20% or less, 10% or less of ST). That is, it may be assumed that a specific condition is satisfied when the jackpot game is executed with a small number of variable games after the end of the jackpot game. On the contrary, it can be assumed that a specific condition is satisfied when the jackpot lottery is won just before the end of ST (for example, the remaining ST is 20% or less, 10% or less, 5% or less).

In addition, in ST machines and V-ST machines, the player is made to predict at what stage of ST the jackpot lottery will be won or not, and if the player's prediction is correct, the profit information will be estimated or recognized. It is also conceivable to provide the player with information that enables the player. In this case, for example, when ST is 100 times, 20 times or less, 20 times or more and 40 times or less, 40 times or more and 60 times or less, 60 times or more and 80 times or less, 80 times or more and 100 times or less, 100 times or less. It is conceivable that it does not hit. Then, when making the player predict, odds may be given to each option as described above, and information corresponding to the odds may be provided to the player.

It is also conceivable to establish specific conditions when a situation that is disadvantageous to the player occurs. Examples of situations that are disadvantageous to the player include:

(1) When the normal jackpot is consecutive a predetermined number of times as a lottery result in the jackpot lottery (including once)
(2) When a jackpot (5R probability variation jackpot and 5R normal jackpot in this embodiment) other than the most advantageous jackpot for the player (16R probability variation jackpot in this embodiment) is consecutive as a result of the lottery in the jackpot lottery (1) Including times)
(3) When the normal jackpot is included more than a predetermined number of the specified number of jackpots (when the ratio of the normal jackpot is more than the predetermined ratio)
(4) Among the specified number of jackpots, when a jackpot other than the most advantageous jackpot for the player (16R probability variation jackpot in this embodiment) (5R probability variation jackpot and 5R normal jackpot in this embodiment) is included more than a predetermined number of times ( When the most advantageous jackpot ratio is less than or equal to the specified ratio)
(5) When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode is continuously deviated by a predetermined number of times or more (6) When the difference balls in the high probability mode are a certain number or less (for example, minus difference balls) (7) When the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the low probability mode is out of the specified number of times in a row (8) When the difference ball in the low probability mode is a certain number or more minus the difference ball

In addition, in ST machines and V-ST machines, as a disadvantageous situation for players, if a big hit does not occur during ST when entering ST, a (normal) big hit that does not enter ST as a lottery result in the big hit lottery Examples include a case where the number of consecutive STs is a predetermined number (including one), a case where the number of remaining STs is a predetermined number or more (for example, 80 times or more, 90 times or more, etc.) (when a jackpot is won early from the start of ST).

In addition, points may be added when a disadvantageous situation occurs in a predetermined period, and profit information may be estimated or recognizable information may be provided according to the total points in the predetermined period. In this case, one disadvantageous situation may be set or a plurality of types may be set. When a plurality of types of disadvantageous situations are set, the points when each disadvantageous situation occurs may be the same, or at least a part of them may be different.

[Outline of Invention]
The outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below. In addition, in order to understand the correspondence between each appendix and each embodiment, the description may be given with reference numerals for convenience, but the invention according to the appendix is limited to the specific configuration with the reference numerals. It's not a thing. Further, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.
However, it is possible to focus more on the music output from the audio output means, and it is also possible to focus on the image display means in order to confirm which unit game the unit game in which the music change has occurred is. Become.

[Appendix A1]
Profit information regarding the profit status of the player in the progress of the game (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode Profit information display means (39,341) that can display (etc.) and
A display control means (51) that controls display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) according to the number of times of a specific condition satisfied in a predetermined period.
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can guess and enjoy the profit status based on the content (part or all of the profit information) displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit is satisfied in the predetermined period. You can also enjoy whether or not certain conditions are met up to the maximum number. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the game playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix A2]
The display control means (51) can display the profit information step by step until it can be recognized, and can recognize the profit information at the final stage when a specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, characterized in that it is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, when the specific condition of the upper limit is satisfied, the profit information at the final stage is displayed on the profit information display means, so that the profit status can be recognized based on this profit information. The player who recognizes the profit status is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing the game on the game machine. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to continuing the game with a game machine having a low profit state.

[Appendix A3]
The display control means (51) relates to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) after the elapse of the predetermined period according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A1 or Appendix A2, wherein the display content is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A3, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means after the elapse of a predetermined period is controlled. Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the profit state based on the display content (part or all of the profit information) of the profit information display means after the lapse of a predetermined period. As a result, the game can be enjoyed in anticipation of what kind of content will be displayed on the profit information display means until the predetermined period elapses.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A3, wherein the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period can be recognized.

Since the gaming machine according to Appendix A4 can recognize the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period, the player can easily grasp the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can know in advance that the profit information at the final stage in which the profit status can be recognized is displayed on the profit information display means, for example, when it is confirmed that a specific condition is satisfied more than the upper limit number. .. In addition, even if the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period does not reach the upper limit, the content displayed on the profit information display means (profit information) in consideration of the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The profit status can be estimated based on (a part of). As a result, the accuracy of estimating the profit status is increased and the enjoyment of estimating the profit status is also increased, so that the playability is further improved.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A4, further comprising a retaining means (38) for visually retaining a number of gaming balls corresponding to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the number of times of a specific condition satisfied in a predetermined period can be easily recognized by the number of gaming balls retained in the retention means.

[Appendix A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A5, wherein the specific condition can be satisfied when the game ball passes through the specific area (363).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6, since a specific condition can be established when the specific condition passes through the specific area, the player can easily grasp that the specific condition is satisfied. This makes it more enjoyable as to whether or not certain conditions are met. In addition, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the game ball passes through the specific area of the game area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the game playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through a specific area.

[Appendix A7]
Further equipped with discharge ports (318, 373) for discharging on the back side of the game board (31).
The gaming machine according to Appendix A6, wherein the specific region is the discharge port (318, 373).

[Appendix A8]
It is further equipped with a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) at which prize balls are paid out by entering a game ball.
The discharge ports (318, 373) are a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not been entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board, and the first discharge port (318). Including a second discharge port (373) different from the discharge port (318),
The gaming machine according to Appendix A7, wherein the specific region is the second discharge port (373).

[Appendix A9]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The gaming machine according to Appendix A8, wherein the second discharge port (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

In the game machine according to Appendix A9, the display content regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of the game balls that have entered the second discharge port where the game balls can enter in the special game. .. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the game playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the second discharge port.

[Appendix A10]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A9, wherein the second discharge port (373) is capable of entering a game ball that has passed through the variable winning port (316).

In the game machine according to Appendix A10, profit information is displayed according to the number of game balls that have entered the second discharge port where the game balls that have passed through the variable winning opening where the game balls can enter in the special game can enter. The display content related to the profit information displayed on the means is controlled. Therefore, in the special game, the game ball can be inserted into the second discharge port by launching the game ball into the game area and making the variable winning opening win the game ball. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized by the display content (part or all of the profit information) of the profit information display means without requiring a special skill only by proceeding the game as usual in the special game. As a result, it is possible to avoid playing a game on the game machine because the skill difference can occur as compared with the case where the skill difference can occur because the game ball enters the second discharge port. Be prevented.

[Appendix A11]
It is further equipped with a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) at which prize balls are paid out by entering a game ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A6, wherein the specific area is at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

[Appendix A12]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A11, wherein the specific area is the variable winning opening (316).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A11 and the appendix A12, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the game ball enters the winning opening such as the variable winning opening to which the winning ball is paid out. As a result, when the player acquires the profit of the prize ball, the game property is provided so that the profit information can be inferred or recognizable information can be obtained. Therefore, compared to a game machine in which a winning ball is simply obtained by entering a game ball into the winning opening, the importance of entering the game ball into the winning opening increases, so that the winning ball can be entered into the winning opening. It is possible to make people pay attention to the entry of the game ball into the winning opening, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A13]
Multiple winning openings (313-316) where prize balls are paid out by entering game balls, and
A first discharge port (318) for discharging a game ball that has not been entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board,
A second discharge port (373) and a third discharge port (378) different from the first discharge port (318) that discharge the game ball that has entered the variable winning port (316) to the back side of the game board. When,
A distribution means (37) for distributing the game ball entered into the variable winning port (316) to either the second discharge port (373) or the third discharge port (378).
The gaming machine according to Appendix A12, which further comprises.

In the game machine according to Appendix A13, since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, it depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. The playability is given. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball by the sorting means regarding whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A14]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball.
A game ball launched in the left side region of the game board (31) can enter the first winning opening (314).
The gaming machine according to Appendix A13, wherein the variable winning opening (316) is capable of entering a gaming ball launched into the right region of the gaming board (31).

In the game machine according to Appendix A14, since the game ball launched in the left area of the game board can enter the first winning opening, it is necessary to perform so-called left-handed hitting in order to receive the judgment of transition to the special game. There is. On the other hand, since the game ball launched in the right area of the game board can enter the variable winning opening, it is necessary to perform so-called right-handed hitting in the special game. Then, the distribution means can distribute the game ball launched in the right region of the game board to the second discharge port. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate or recognize the profit state in the game for receiving the determination of transition to the special game, while it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state in the special game. In this way, since it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state when hitting the right side of a special game or the like, it is possible to give motivation to continue the game until the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game.

[Appendix A15]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A13 or Appendix A14, wherein the second discharge port (373) is more difficult to enter the ball than the third discharge port (378).

[Appendix A16]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A15, wherein the second discharge port (373) is provided above the third discharge port (378).

[Appendix A17]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A15 or Appendix A16, wherein the second discharge port (373) has an opening area smaller than that of the third discharge port (378).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A15 to the appendix A17, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second outlet as compared with the third outlet, so that it is difficult to satisfy a specific condition and it is easy to estimate or grasp the profit state. is not it. Therefore, when the profit state of the player is low, for example, when the advantage judgment probability is low, the player can easily grasp that the advantage judgment probability is low, so that the game on the game machine is stopped at an early stage. The occurrence of the situation can be suppressed.

[Appendix A18]
The special game has a value-imparting game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) in which the variable winning opening (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player.
The variable winning opening (316) is opened when the unit game is started so that a game ball can be entered, and is closed by the passage of a predetermined time or the entry of an upper limit number of game balls.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A12, wherein the specific condition is that a game ball exceeding the upper limit number is entered into the variable winning opening (316).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A18, when there is an excessive winning number (so-called over winning) exceeding the upper limit number of the variable winning openings in the unit game of the special game, the profit information display means displays the profit information. In other words, it is not possible to estimate or recognize the profit status without over-winning. As a result, it is possible to suppress the so-called stop hitting in which the firing of the game balls is stopped at the end of the unit game or between the unit games (interval) for the purpose of reducing the number of launching game balls in the unit game of the special game.

[Appendix A19]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A starting port (314, 315) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by passing the game ball, and
With more
The gaming machine according to Appendix A6, wherein the specific region is the starting port (314, 315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A19, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the game ball enters the starting port that satisfies the judgment condition for determining the transition to the special gaming state. Will be done. As a result, the game property is provided so that the player can obtain the profit of guessing the profit information or obtaining recognizable information when the player obtains the profit of satisfying the determination condition. Therefore, the importance of entering the game ball into the start port is increased as compared with the game machine in which the profit that the judgment condition is simply satisfied is obtained by entering the game ball into the start port. Therefore, the game ball into the start port. Focusing on the entry of the ball, it is possible to make the player interested in the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A20]
A retention means (38) for retaining a game ball that has passed through the specific area (373) in the predetermined period and releasing the game ball after the lapse of the predetermined period is further provided.
The display control means (51) relates to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) after the elapse of the predetermined period according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A6 to Supplementary A19, wherein the display content is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A20, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means after the elapse of a predetermined period is controlled. Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the profit information based on the display content (part or all of the profit information) of the profit information display means after the lapse of a predetermined period. As a result, the game can be enjoyed in anticipation of what kind of content will be displayed on the profit information display means until the predetermined period elapses.

[Appendix A21]
The retention means (38) is a movable member (383) that can move between a first position (upper limit position) that restricts the movement of the game ball and a second position (lower limit position) that allows the movement of the game ball. With
The gaming machine according to Appendix A20, wherein the movable member (383) is in the first position at least at the beginning of the predetermined period, and is in the second position at the end of the predetermined period.

In the game machine according to Appendix A21, it is possible to switch between a state in which the game ball is retained and a state in which the game ball is not retained in the retention means by a simple configuration and control of moving the movable member.

[Appendix A22]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A20 or Appendix A21, wherein the gaming ball retained in the retention means (38) is visible.

In the game machine according to Appendix A22, since the game balls retained in the retention means can be visually recognized, the player can easily grasp the number of game balls retained in the retention means (the number of specific conditions satisfied). .. Therefore, for example, when the player confirms that the upper limit number or more of the game balls are retained in the retention means, the player knows in advance that the profit information at the final stage in which the profit status can be recognized is displayed on the profit information display means. I can grasp it. Further, even if the number of game balls less than the upper limit is retained in the retention means, the profit is obtained based on the content (a part of the profit information) displayed on the profit information display means in consideration of the number of visually recognized game balls. The state can be inferred. As a result, the accuracy of estimating the profit status is increased and the enjoyment of estimating the profit status is also increased, so that the playability is further improved.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A5, wherein the specific condition is satisfied when a specific event occurs during the progress of the game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A23, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the specific condition established by the occurrence of a specific event during the game is satisfied within a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy whether or not a specific event occurs during the progress of the game, and is displayed on the profit information display means when the specific condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the specific event. You can guess the profit status and enjoy it depending on the contents. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated when a specific event occurs during the progress of the game, the game playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue the game. ..

[Appendix A24]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A23, wherein the specific event occurs when the player obtains a profit.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A24, the display content regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when a specific condition is satisfied by the occurrence of a specific event triggered by the player's profit. To. As a result, the game is provided with an additional benefit of guessing profit information or obtaining recognizable information when the profit is obtained, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A25]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A24, wherein the specific event occurs when a player obtains a profit and a new profit is obtained by obtaining the profit.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A25, it is displayed on the profit information display means when a specific condition is satisfied by the occurrence of a specific event due to the acquisition of a new profit triggered by the player's profit. The display content related to profit information is controlled. As a result, when a new profit is obtained as a result of obtaining a profit, the game is given an additional profit of guessing profit information or obtaining recognizable information, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. Be improved.

[Appendix A26]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The gaming machine according to Appendix A24 or Appendix A25, wherein the specific event is a transition to the special gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A26, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the player acquires the profit of being shifted to the special gaming state. As a result, when the game shifts to the special game state, the game is provided with an additional benefit of guessing profit information or obtaining recognizable information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A27]
The special game has a value-imparting game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) in which the variable winning opening (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player.
The variable winning opening (316) is opened when the unit game is started so that a game ball can be entered, and is closed by the passage of a predetermined time or the entry of an upper limit number of game balls.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A26, wherein the specific condition is that a game ball exceeding the upper limit number is entered into the variable winning opening (316).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A27, when the profit of excessive winning (so-called over winning) exceeding the upper limit of the variable winning opening is obtained in the unit game of the special game, the profit information is displayed on the profit information display means. As a result, when the profit of excessive winning in the unit game of the special game is obtained, the game is given the additional benefit of guessing the profit information or obtaining recognizable information. Is improved. In addition, since it is not possible to estimate or recognize the profit status without excessive winning, the game balls are played at the end of the unit game or between the unit games (interval) for the purpose of reducing the number of launch game balls in the unit game of the special game. It is possible to suppress the so-called stoppage of stopping the firing.

[Appendix A28]
The game according to Appendix A26, wherein the specific condition is that the number of times determined to shift to the special game state (big hit game state) by the shift determination means (41) reaches a predetermined number of times. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A28, when the game machine shifts to the special gaming state a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period, the profit information display means displays the profit information. As a result, by accumulating the profits of shifting to the special gaming state a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period, the gameability is given, which gives an additional benefit of guessing profit information or obtaining recognizable information. The interest is improved.

[Appendix A29]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A23, wherein the specific event occurs when the player receives a disadvantage.

[Appendix A30]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The disadvantage is the determination result of shifting to the first special gaming state consecutively a predetermined number of times when the determination result of shifting to the special gaming state is obtained in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41). The gaming machine according to Appendix A29, wherein the above is obtained.

[Appendix A31]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The disadvantage is described in Appendix A29, wherein in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), a determination result that the transition to the special gaming state is continuously performed a predetermined number of times cannot be obtained. Game machine.

[Appendix A32]
A game state transition means (41) that shifts the game state by establishing a predetermined state among a plurality of game states, and
Based on the establishment of the judgment condition, a transition judgment (big hit lottery) is made as to whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. Judgment means (41) and
With more
The gaming states include the special gaming state (big hit gaming state), the first gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified, and the transition determination means (41). ) Includes a second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state is higher than that of the first gaming state and the result of the transition determination is notified.
The game state transition means (41) is
In the first gaming state or the second gaming state, when it is determined by the transition determination means (41) to shift to the special gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state.
In the second gaming state, when it is not determined by the transition determination means (41) to shift to the special gaming state before the upper limit number of transition determinations is received by the transition determination means (41). , The gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state,
The disadvantage is that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special gaming state by the time the transition determination of half or less of the upper limit is received in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to Appendix A31, which is a feature.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A29 to the appendix A32, the display regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means when a specific condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of a specific event triggered by the player getting a disadvantage. The content is controlled. Specifically, for example, when the normal jackpots are continuous, the misses are not consecutive jackpots, or the number of remaining STs is large in the ST machine, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled. To. That is, as a remedy for the player to get a disadvantage, information that can guess or recognize the profit information is given. As a result, the disadvantage to the player can be relieved, and the game is given the game property that the profit information can be guessed or recognized as the remedy for the disadvantage, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A33]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The special game has a value-imparting game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) in which the variable winning opening (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A32, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A33, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started? Can be enjoyed.

[Appendix A34]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The start of the predetermined period is from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-imparting game, which is transferred when the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix A33, which is set to.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A34, in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than that in the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is the special gaming. It is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-imparting game when the game is to be transferred to. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first hit special game and the start time of the value-imparting game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive villa, so an opportunity to estimate or recognize the profit status for each first hit is guaranteed. ..

[Appendix A35]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The special game has a value-imparting game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) in which the variable winning opening (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player.
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-imparting game to the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A34.

[Appendix A36]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A35, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game.

By the way, from the end of the value-imparting game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to Appendix A35 and Appendix A36, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-imparting game and the end of the jackpot game, a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. In that case, it becomes possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means by using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix A37]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A36, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A37, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-imparting game in the first special gaming state and the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the single-shot hit in which the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is used. The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state is used. If the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, the relevant The predetermined period ends from the end of the value-giving game in the first special game state to the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive villa ends and the end of the special game. Will be done. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive villa, a predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive villa, so that the predetermined period is longer than that of a single shot, and the more times the transition to the second special game state is performed, the more the predetermined period is set. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times a specific condition is satisfied per consecutive villa is higher than that per single shot, and the greater the number of consecutive villas per consecutive villa, the higher the number of times a specific condition is satisfied. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive villas increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized.

[Appendix A38]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A37, wherein the profit information display means (39,341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A38, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to give a game property that can adjust the difficulty of guessing the profit information depending on which information of the plurality of information is displayed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A39]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A38, wherein specific information in a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A39, since specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, it is possible to estimate profit information based on the correspondence relationship. .. As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the profit information while looking forward to which information of the plurality of information is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A40]
Addendum A39, wherein the display control means (51) targets a number of display areas corresponding to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period among the plurality of display areas. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A40, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can infer the profit status from the content displayed on the profit information display means and enjoy the profit state until the specific condition of the upper limit is satisfied in a predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit. You can also enjoy whether or not you are satisfied. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the game playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix A41]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A38 to Appendix A40, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A41, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such a profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip a profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing a complicated configuration of a game machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A42]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A 41, wherein the profit information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A42, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so that the profit information can be easily guessed or recognized, and the process of guessing the profit information without requiring advanced knowledge is simplified. You can enjoy it.

[Appendix A43]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A38 to Appendix A40, wherein the profit information display means (341) can display a profit status image suggesting or clearly indicating the profit status.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A43, since the profit information display means can display the profit state image in which the profit information can be recognized, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process for displaying the profit state image. Therefore, it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. As a result, the playability for estimating or recognizing the profit state is improved.

[Appendix A44]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The supplementary note A43 is characterized in that the profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination is variablely displayed. The game machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A44, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the decorative pattern that notifies or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when the image display means displays the variable display image in the game machine, the profit state image can be displayed by using the image display means. As a result, the profit status image is displayed by using the display means required for the game machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the profit status image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A45]
The profit state image contains a plurality of image elements.
The display control means (51)
The plurality of image elements are displayed stepwise by the profit information display means (341) according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period.
The gaming machine according to Supplementary A43 to Appendix A44, wherein the profit information display means (341) displays the profit state image when the specific condition of the upper limit is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A45, a plurality of image elements are displayed stepwise on the profit information display means according to the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can recognize the profit state when the specific condition of the maximum number is satisfied, and when the specific condition of the maximum number is not satisfied, the profit is made according to the number of the specific condition satisfied. It is possible to estimate and enjoy the profit state by combining the image elements displayed on the information display means, and also to enjoy whether or not a specific condition is satisfied up to the upper limit. In this way, the fact that the profit state can be recognized or estimated improves the game playability and can give the player a motivation to continue playing the game.

[Appendix A46]
The profit information display means (341) has a plurality of individual areas capable of displaying a plurality of profit state candidate images including the profit state image.
The profit information display means (341) displays the profit state candidate image in each of the plurality of individual areas when the specific condition is not satisfied in the predetermined period.
The addition: the display control means (51) changes the visibility of the profit state candidate image excluding the number of profit state images corresponding to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to A45.

[Appendix A47]
The display control means (51) is characterized in that the profit state candidate images other than the number of profit state image images corresponding to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period are invisible or difficult to see. The gaming machine according to Appendix A46.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A46 and the appendix A47, the visibility of the profit state candidate image excluding the profit state image is changed according to the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can recognize the profit status from the profit status image when the specific condition of the upper limit is satisfied, and the number of the specific conditions to be satisfied when the specific condition of the upper limit is not satisfied. It is possible to infer the profit status from the profit status candidate image with no change in visibility displayed on the profit information display means according to the situation, and also enjoy whether or not a specific condition is satisfied up to the upper limit. Can be done. In this way, the fact that the profit state can be recognized or estimated improves the game playability and can give the player a motivation to continue playing the game.

[Appendix A48]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of a number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. , The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A47, characterized in that they are executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A48, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, the control of displaying the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Will be executed. Therefore, the player can infer and enjoy the profit state based on the number and order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

[Appendix A49]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A48, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A49, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) at which the profit status can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled, it is possible to impart a game property that can adjust the difficulty of estimating the profit information, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A50]
The display control means (51) follows an order specified by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. , The gaming machine according to Appendix A49, which controls the display of the plurality of pieces of information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A50, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, with the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that are easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that are difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and by setting a large number of a plurality of order patterns or setting them so that they can be easily selected, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and it is early when the profit status is low. It is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine during the game from being stopped. Further, by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which it is easy to estimate or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns in which it is difficult to estimate or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy estimating the profit state.

[Appendix A51]
The game according to Appendix A48, wherein the display control means (51) controls the display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A51, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information randomly selected from the plurality of information is controlled. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being inferred or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to Appendix A50, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control required to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of information is simple. Be transformed.

[Appendix A52]
The display control means (51) displays the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) when the player performs an operation on the operation means when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A51, characterized in that the content is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A52, when a player performs an operation on the operating means when a specific condition is satisfied, the display content regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information displaying means is controlled. Therefore, the player can obtain a part or all of the profit information by operating the operating means when a specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the playability is improved by actively participating the player in order to display a part or all of the profit information on the profit information display means.

[Appendix A53]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information.
The profit information display means (39,341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.
When the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, it is possible to select a display area to be controlled by the display control means (51) from the plurality of display areas by operating the operation means. The gaming machine according to Appendix A52.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A53, the player can select a display area for displaying any information (a part of profit information) from a plurality of display areas when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player can estimate the profit state by selecting the display area at his / her own discretion and obtaining a part of the profit information. As a result, different information can be obtained by selecting a different display area each time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the profit state can be estimated and enjoyed based on a combination of different information.

[Appendix A54]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A53, wherein the specific condition causes the player to predict an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses, and the player's prediction is correct.

[Appendix A55]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
The production means (341) in which the production is executed in the progress of the game, and
With more
The special game includes a plurality of special games having different advantages for the player.
The event is a transition determination from the time when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is transferred to the special game to the time when the result of the transition determination is then transferred to the special game. Addition that includes at least one of the number of times, the type of the special game when the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game, and the effect type executed by the effect means. The gaming machine according to A54.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix A54 and Appendix A55, if the player is made to predict an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses and the player's prediction is correct as a specific condition, the player changes. You can enjoy whether or not the prediction is correct in the game or the jackpot game. In addition, compared to the case where profit information such as information on game setting values can be passively estimated or recognized as the game progresses, the consciousness of participation in the game is improved, and the process of estimating or recognizing profit information is performed. You can enjoy it even more.

[Appendix A56]
When the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the display control of a number of display areas corresponding to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period from the plurality of display areas is performed by an operation on the operating means. The gaming machine according to Appendix A55, which can be selected as a control target by the means (51).

[Appendix A57]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A55 or Appendix A56, wherein specific information in a corresponding relationship among the plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A56 and the appendix A57, a number of display areas corresponding to the number of special conditions satisfied in a predetermined period can be selected from a plurality of display areas by operating the operating means. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during a predetermined period, two or more of the plurality of information can be obtained by selecting a number of display areas according to the number of times. As a result, it becomes possible to obtain two or more pieces of information after a lapse of a predetermined period of time, so that it is possible to estimate and enjoy the profit state based on a combination of different information.

[Appendix A58]
The additional note that the profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) that is an index indicating the payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A57.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A58, since the profit information is the performance information that is an index indicating the ball ejection performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance of the game machine as the profit state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball ejection performance. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix A59]
The advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting the advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. Further prepare
The gaming machine according to Appendix A58, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A59, since the profit information includes information on the advantage determination probability that has a great influence on the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine, the advantage determination probability can be estimated or recognized, so that the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine can be estimated or recognized. Can be estimated or recognized based on the index that is more appropriately reflected. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the advantage judgment probability, enjoys the game while expecting that the advantage judgment probability becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the advantage judgment probability. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix A60]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A58 or Appendix A59, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball ejection performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A60, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes information indicating the ball ejection performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning openings, the player can eject the ball based on the winning opening. It is possible to guess or recognize the performance information indicating. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the game machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the game machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening becomes recognizable, and estimates the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix A61]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball.
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of different balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of balls launched to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to Appendix A60, which includes information on the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination is made by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball.

Since the gaming machine according to Appendix A61 includes information on the number of unit determinations as performance information which is advantageous information, information on the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low probability mode is not the time saving mode). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations, the player can infer or recognize the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal gaming state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting that the number of unit judgments can be recognized, and continues the game based on the estimation of the number of unit judgments or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix A62]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are made to pay out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of the game balls. The first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity and the general winning opening (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the winning of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening. Including
The performance information includes the number of balls to be paid out for the number of balls to be launched into the first winning opening (314) with respect to the number of balls to be launched to the game board (31) and the general winning opening (313). The gaming machine according to Appendix A60, which includes information on the payout rate (base), which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A62, since the performance information includes information on the ball output rate as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the ball output rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the ball output rate is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, the player can infer or recognize the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the payout rate, enjoys the game while expecting that the payout rate becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the payout rate. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix A63]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). The gaming machine according to Appendix A60, which includes information on a continuous accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the number of balls to be paid out to the incoming ball.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A63, since the performance information includes information on the continuous bonus ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the continuous bonus ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the payout to the game balls to the variable winning openings. It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (balls in the special game state). It is an index showing the rate). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the continuous bonus ratio becomes recognizable, and plays the game based on the guess or recognition result of the continuous bonus ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not to continue.

[Appendix A64]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are the first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the game by the support of the electric accessory. The second winning opening (315), which allows the ball to enter and gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball in the special gaming state. Including possible variable winning openings (316),
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls entering the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). It is characterized by including information on the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix A60.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A64, since the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the accessory ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings, of the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. That is, the bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (short-time game state) supported by the electric bonus, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the information regarding the accessory ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state) and the support of the electric accessory are supported. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the support game state (short-time game state) to be received, and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special gaming state). As a result, the player enjoys guessing the character ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the character ratio becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the character ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix A65]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Appendix 64, wherein the performance information is information on an expected value of a ball output.

[Appendix A66]
The expected ball output value is the expected number of ball output (number of payout game balls) with respect to the total number of launched game balls (total number of out balls) when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are launched. The gaming machine according to Appendix A65, which is characterized in that it is a ratio.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A65 and the appendix A66, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes the information regarding the expected ball output value, the information regarding the expected ball output value can be estimated or recognized. Here, the expected ball output value is, for example, the expected number of balls to be ejected (paid out game balls) with respect to the total number of launched game balls (total number of out balls) when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are launched. Number). The expected payout value is 100% when the total number of launched game balls (total number of out balls) and the expected number of payout balls (payout game balls) are the same, and the expected number of payout balls (payout game). It is more than 100% when the number of balls is larger, and less than 100% when the expected number of balls to be paid out (number of game balls to be paid out) is smaller. That is, when the expected value of ball ejection exceeds 100%, it is advantageous for the player, and the higher the value, the higher the ball ejection performance. On the other hand, when the expected value of ball ejection is less than 100%, it is disadvantageous to the player, and the lower the value, the lower the ball ejection performance. In this way, since the expected ball ejection performance has a high correlation with the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine, for example, the variation in the ball ejection performance between the gaming machines due to individual differences during manufacturing of the gaming machine and aging changes becomes more significant. It becomes possible for the player to guess or recognize the appropriately reflected ball ejection performance. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the expected ball output value, enjoys the game while expecting that the expected ball output value becomes recognizable, and plays the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the expected ball output value. It becomes possible to judge whether or not to continue.

[Appendix A67]
A transition determination means (41) that determines whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition (big hit lottery).
The first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and
The game ball enters the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of balls fired on the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. A unit determination number calculation means (41) that calculates the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination is made by the transition determination means (41) triggered by a sphere.
A borderline calculation means (51) that calculates a borderline, which is the number of transition determinations required for ball rental per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in order to set the expected ball output value to 100%.
With more
The expected ball output value is a borderline sufficiency rate which is a ratio of the unit determination number calculated by the determination number calculation means (41) to the borderline calculated by the borderline calculation means (51). The gaming machine according to Appendix A65, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A67, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes the information about the borderline sufficiency rate which is an example of the expected ball output value, the information about the borderline sufficiency rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the borderline is the number of transition judgments required for the ball rental per unit amount in order to set the expected ball output value to 100%, and generally, the result of the transition judgment is a special game according to the advantageous judgment probability. It is calculated on the assumption that it will be transferred to. The borderline sufficiency rate is the ratio of the number of unit judgments to the borderline. If it exceeds 100%, the larger the value, the more advantageous the player, and if it is less than 100%, the smaller the value, the more the game. It is disadvantageous to the person. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information about the borderline sufficiency rate, so that he can guess and enjoy the borderline sufficiency rate, and enjoy the game while expecting that the borderline sufficiency rate can be recognized. It becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the borderline sufficiency rate.

[Appendix B1]
Profit information regarding the profit status of the player in the progress of the game (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode Profit information display means (39,341) that can display (etc.) and
A display control means (51) that controls display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) according to the number of times of a specific condition satisfied in a predetermined period.
With
The game machine is characterized in that the specific condition can be satisfied when the game ball passes through a specific area.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, since a specific condition can be established when the specific condition passes through the specific area, the player can easily grasp that the specific condition is satisfied. This makes it more enjoyable as to whether or not certain conditions are met. In addition, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the game ball passes through the specific area of the game area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the game playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through a specific area.

[Appendix B2]
Further provided with discharge ports (318, 373) for discharging the game balls flowing down into the game area to the back side of the game board.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, wherein the specific region is the discharge port (318, 373).

[Appendix B3]
It is further equipped with a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) at which prize balls are paid out by entering a game ball.
The discharge ports (318, 373) are a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not been entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board, and the first discharge port (318). Including a second discharge port (373) different from the discharge port (318),
The gaming machine according to Appendix B2, wherein the specific region is the second discharge port (373).

[Appendix B4]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The gaming machine according to Appendix B3, wherein the second discharge port (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

In the game machine according to Appendix B4, the display content regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of the game balls that have entered the second discharge port where the game balls can enter in the special game. .. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the game playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the second discharge port.

[Appendix B5]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B4, wherein the second discharge port (373) is capable of entering a game ball that has passed through the variable winning port (316).

In the game machine according to Appendix B5, profit information is displayed according to the number of game balls that have entered the second discharge port where the game balls that have passed through the variable winning opening where the game balls can enter in the special game can enter. The display content related to the profit information displayed on the means is controlled. Therefore, in the special game, the game ball can be inserted into the second discharge port by launching the game ball into the game area and making the variable winning opening win the game ball. Therefore, in the special game, the profit state can be estimated or recognized without requiring a special skill only by proceeding the game as usual. As a result, it is possible to avoid playing a game on the game machine because the skill difference can occur as compared with the case where the skill difference can occur because the game ball enters the second discharge port. Be prevented.

[Appendix B6]
It is further equipped with a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) at which prize balls are paid out by entering a game ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, wherein the specific area is at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

[Appendix B7]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B6, wherein the specific area is the variable winning opening (316).

In the game machine according to the appendix B6 and the appendix B7, the display content regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the game ball enters the winning opening such as the variable winning opening to which the winning ball is paid out. As a result, when the player acquires the profit of the prize ball, the game property is provided so that the profit information can be inferred or recognizable information can be obtained. Therefore, compared to a game machine in which a winning ball is simply obtained by entering a game ball into the winning opening, the importance of entering the game ball into the winning opening increases, so that the winning ball can be entered into the winning opening. It is possible to make people pay attention to the entry of the game ball into the winning opening, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B8]
The special game has a value-imparting game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) in which the variable winning opening (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player.
The variable winning opening (316) is opened when the unit game is started so that a game ball can be entered, and is closed by the passage of a predetermined time or the entry of an upper limit number of game balls.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B7, wherein the specific condition is that a gaming ball exceeding the upper limit number is entered into the variable winning opening (316).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B8, when there is an excessive winning number (so-called over winning) exceeding the upper limit number of the variable winning openings in the unit game of the special game, the profit information display means displays the profit information. In other words, it is not possible to estimate or recognize the profit status without over-winning. As a result, it is possible to suppress the so-called stop hitting in which the firing of the game balls is stopped at the end of the unit game or between the unit games (interval) for the purpose of reducing the number of launching game balls in the unit game of the special game.

[Appendix B9]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A starting port (314, 315) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by passing the game ball, and
With more
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, wherein the specific region is the starting port (314, 315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B9, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the game ball enters the starting port that satisfies the judgment condition for determining the transition to the special gaming state. Will be done. As a result, the game property is provided so that the player can obtain the profit of guessing the profit information or obtaining recognizable information when the player obtains the profit of satisfying the determination condition. Therefore, the importance of entering the game ball into the start port is increased as compared with the game machine in which the profit that the judgment condition is simply satisfied is obtained by entering the game ball into the start port. Therefore, the game ball into the start port. Focusing on the entry of the ball, it is possible to make the player interested in the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B10]
A retention means (38) for retaining a game ball that has passed through the specific area (373) in the predetermined period and releasing the game ball after the lapse of the predetermined period is further provided.
The display control means (51) relates to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) after the elapse of the predetermined period according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B9, characterized in that the display content is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B10, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means after the elapse of a predetermined period is controlled. Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the profit state based on the display content of the profit information display means after the lapse of a predetermined period. As a result, the game can be enjoyed in anticipation of what kind of content will be displayed on the profit information display means until the predetermined period elapses.

[Appendix B11]
The retention means (38) is a movable member (383) that can move between a first position (upper limit position) that restricts the movement of the game ball and a second position (lower limit position) that allows the movement of the game ball. With
The gaming machine according to Appendix B10, wherein the movable member (383) is in the first position at least at the beginning of the predetermined period, and is in the second position at the end of the predetermined period.

In the game machine according to Appendix B11, it is possible to switch between a state in which the game ball is retained and a state in which the game ball is not retained in the retention means by a simple configuration and control of moving the movable member.

[Appendix B12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B10 or Appendix B11, wherein the gaming ball retained in the retention means (38) is visible.

In the game machine according to Appendix B12, since the game balls retained in the retention means can be visually recognized, the player can easily grasp the number of game balls retained in the retention means (the number of specific conditions satisfied). .. Therefore, the player can grasp in advance that the profit status is recognizablely displayed on the profit information display means when, for example, it is confirmed that the game balls of the upper limit number or more are stayed in the retention means. Further, even when the number of game balls less than the upper limit is retained in the retention means, the profit state can be estimated based on the content displayed on the profit information display means in consideration of the number of visually recognized game balls. .. As a result, the accuracy of estimating the profit status is increased and the enjoyment of estimating the profit status is also increased, so that the playability is further improved.

[Appendix B13]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The special game has a value-imparting game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) in which the variable winning opening (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B11 or Appendix B12, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B13, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started? Can be enjoyed.

[Appendix B14]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The start of the predetermined period is from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-imparting game, which is transferred when the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix B13, characterized in that it is set to.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B14, in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than that in the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is the special gaming. It is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-imparting game when the game is to be transferred to. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first hit special game and the start time of the value-imparting game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive villa, so an opportunity to estimate or recognize the profit status for each first hit is guaranteed. ..

[Appendix B15]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The special game has a value-imparting game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) in which the variable winning opening (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player.
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-imparting game to the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B14.

[Appendix B16]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B15, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game.

By the way, from the end of the value-imparting game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to the appendices B15 and B16, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-imparting game and the end of the jackpot game, a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. In that case, it becomes possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means by using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix B17]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B16, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B17, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game in the first special game state and the end time of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the single-shot hit in which the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is used. The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state is used. If the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, the relevant The predetermined period ends from the end of the value-giving game in the first special game state to the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive villa ends and the end of the special game. Will be done. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive villa, a predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive villa, so that the predetermined period is longer than that per one-shot, and the more times the transition to the second special game state is performed, the more the predetermined period The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times a specific condition is satisfied per consecutive villa is higher than that per single shot, and the greater the number of consecutive villas per consecutive villa, the higher the number of times a specific condition is satisfied. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive villas increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized.

[Appendix B18]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B17, wherein the profit information display means (39,341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B18, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to give a game property that can adjust the difficulty of guessing the profit information depending on which information of the plurality of information is displayed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B19]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B18, wherein specific information in a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B19, since specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, it is possible to estimate profit information based on the correspondence relationship. .. As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the profit information while looking forward to which information of the plurality of information is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix B20]
Addendum B19, wherein the display control means (51) targets a number of display areas corresponding to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period among the plurality of display areas. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B20, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can infer the profit status from the content displayed on the profit information display means and enjoy the profit state until the specific condition of the upper limit is satisfied in a predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit. You can also enjoy whether or not you are satisfied. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the game playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix B21]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B18 to B20, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B21, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such a profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip a profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing a complicated configuration of a game machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix B22]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B21, wherein the profit information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B22, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so that the profit information can be easily guessed or recognized, and the process of guessing the profit information without requiring advanced knowledge is simplified. You can enjoy it.

[Appendix B23]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B17 to B20, wherein the profit information display means (341) can display a profit status image suggesting or clearly indicating the profit status.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B23, since the profit information display means can display the profit state image in which the profit information can be recognized, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process for displaying the profit state image. Therefore, it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. As a result, the playability for estimating or recognizing the profit state is improved.

[Appendix B24]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination is variablely displayed. The game machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B24, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the decorative pattern that notifies or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when the image display means displays the variable display image in the game machine, the profit state image can be displayed by using the image display means. As a result, the profit status image is displayed by using the display means required for the game machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the profit status image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix B25]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of a number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. , The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B17 to B24, characterized in that they are executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B25, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, the control of displaying the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Will be executed. Therefore, the player can infer and enjoy the profit state based on the number and order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

[Appendix B26]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B25, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B26, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) at which the profit status can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled, it is possible to impart a game property that can adjust the difficulty of estimating the profit information, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B27]
The display control means (51) follows an order specified by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix B26, which controls the display of the plurality of pieces of information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B27, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, with the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that are easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that are difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and by setting a large number of a plurality of order patterns or setting them so that they can be easily selected, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and it is early when the profit status is low. It is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine during the game from being stopped. Further, by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which it is easy to estimate or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns in which it is difficult to estimate or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy estimating the profit state.

[Appendix B28]
The game according to Appendix B26, wherein the display control means (51) controls the display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B28, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information randomly selected from the plurality of information is controlled. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being inferred or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to Appendix B28, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control required to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of information is simple. Be transformed.

[Appendix B29]
The additional note that the profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) that is an index indicating the payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B28.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B29, since the profit information is the performance information that is an index indicating the ball ejection performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance of the game machine as the profit state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball ejection performance. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix B30]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting the advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. Further prepare
The gaming machine according to Appendix B29, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B30, since the profit information includes information on the advantage determination probability that has a great influence on the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine, the advantage determination probability can be estimated or recognized, so that the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine can be estimated or recognized. Can be estimated or recognized based on the index that is more appropriately reflected. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the advantage judgment probability, enjoys the game while expecting that the advantage judgment probability becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the advantage judgment probability. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix B31]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B29 or Appendix B30, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball ejection performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B31, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes information indicating the ball ejection performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning openings, the player can eject the ball based on the winning opening. It is possible to guess or recognize the performance information indicating. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the game machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the game machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening becomes recognizable, and estimates the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix B32]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball.
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of different balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of balls launched to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to Appendix B31, which includes information on the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination is made by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball.

Since the gaming machine according to Appendix B32 includes information on the number of unit determinations as performance information which is advantageous information, information on the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low probability mode is not the time saving mode). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations, the player can infer or recognize the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal gaming state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting that the number of unit judgments can be recognized, and continues the game based on the estimation of the number of unit judgments or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix B33]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are made to pay out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of the game balls. The first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity and the general winning opening (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the winning of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening. Including
The performance information includes the number of balls to be paid out for the number of balls to be launched into the first winning opening (314) with respect to the number of balls to be launched to the game board (31) and the general winning opening (313). The gaming machine according to Appendix B31, which includes information on the payout rate (base), which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B33, since the performance information includes information on the ball output rate as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the ball output rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the ball output rate is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, the player can infer or recognize the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the payout rate, enjoys the game while expecting that the payout rate becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the payout rate. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix B34]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). The gaming machine according to Appendix B31, which includes information on a continuous accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the number of balls to be paid out to the incoming ball.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B34, since the performance information includes information on the continuous bonus ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the continuous bonus ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the payout to the game balls to the variable winning openings. It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (balls in the special game state). It is an index showing the rate). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the continuous bonus ratio becomes recognizable, and plays the game based on the guess or recognition result of the continuous bonus ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not to continue.

[Appendix B35]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are the first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the game by the support of the electric accessory. The second winning opening (315), which allows the ball to enter and gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball in the special gaming state. Including possible variable winning openings (316),
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls entering the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). It is characterized by including information on the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix B31.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B35, since the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the accessory ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings, of the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. That is, the bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (short-time game state) supported by the electric bonus, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the information regarding the accessory ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state) and the support of the electric accessory are supported. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the support game state (short-time game state) to be received, and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special gaming state). As a result, the player enjoys guessing the character ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the character ratio becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the character ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix C1]
Profit information regarding the profit status of the player in the progress of the game (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode Profit information display means (39,341) that can display (etc.) and
A display control means (51) that controls display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) according to the number of times of a specific condition satisfied in a predetermined period.
With
The game machine is characterized in that the specific condition is satisfied when a specific event occurs during the progress of the game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the specific condition established by the occurrence of a specific event during the game is satisfied within a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy whether or not a specific event occurs during the progress of the game, and is displayed on the profit information display means when the specific condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the specific event. You can guess the profit status and enjoy it depending on the contents. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated when a specific event occurs during the progress of the game, the game playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue the game. ..

[Appendix C2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, wherein the specific event occurs when the player obtains a profit.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C2, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when a specific condition is satisfied by the occurrence of a specific event triggered by the player's profit. To. As a result, the game is provided with an additional benefit of guessing profit information or obtaining recognizable information when the profit is obtained, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C2, wherein the specific event occurs when a player obtains a profit and a new profit is obtained by obtaining the profit.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C3, it is displayed on the profit information display means when a specific condition is satisfied by the occurrence of a specific event due to the acquisition of a new profit triggered by the player's profit. The display content related to profit information is controlled. As a result, when a new profit is obtained as a result of obtaining a profit, the game is given an additional profit of guessing profit information or obtaining recognizable information, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. Be improved.

[Appendix C4]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The gaming machine according to Appendix C2 or Appendix C3, wherein the specific event is a transition to the special gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C4, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the player acquires the profit of being shifted to the special gaming state. As a result, when the game shifts to the special game state, the game is provided with an additional benefit of guessing profit information or obtaining recognizable information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C5]
The special game has a value-imparting game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) in which the variable winning opening (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player.
The variable winning opening (316) is opened when the unit game is started so that a game ball can be entered, and is closed by the passage of a predetermined time or the entry of an upper limit number of game balls.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C4, wherein the specific condition is that a gaming ball exceeding the upper limit number is entered into the variable winning opening (316).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C5, when the profit of excess winning (so-called over winning) exceeding the upper limit of the variable winning opening is obtained in the unit game of the special game, the profit information is displayed on the profit information display means. As a result, when the profit of excessive winning in the unit game of the special game is obtained, the game is given the additional benefit of guessing the profit information or obtaining recognizable information. Is improved. In addition, since it is not possible to estimate or recognize the profit status without excessive winning, the game balls are played at the end of the unit game or between the unit games (interval) for the purpose of reducing the number of launch game balls in the unit game of the special game. It is possible to suppress the so-called stoppage of stopping the firing.

[Appendix C6]
The game according to Appendix C4, wherein the specific condition is that the number of times it is determined by the transition determination means (41) to shift to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) reaches a predetermined number of times. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C6, when the game machine shifts to the special gaming state a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period, the profit information display means displays the profit information. As a result, by accumulating the profits of shifting to the special gaming state a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period, the gameability is given, which gives an additional benefit of guessing profit information or obtaining recognizable information. The interest is improved.

[Appendix C7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, wherein the specific event occurs when the player receives a disadvantage.

[Appendix C8]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The disadvantage is the determination result of shifting to the first special gaming state consecutively a predetermined number of times when the determination result of shifting to the special gaming state is obtained in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41). The gaming machine according to Appendix C7, characterized in that

[Appendix C9]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The disadvantage is described in Appendix C7, wherein in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), a determination result that the transition to the special gaming state is continuously performed a predetermined number of times cannot be obtained. Game machine.

[Appendix C10]
A game state transition means (41) that shifts the game state by establishing a predetermined state among a plurality of game states, and
Based on the establishment of the judgment condition, a transition judgment (big hit lottery) is made as to whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. Judgment means (41) and
With more
The gaming states include the special gaming state (big hit gaming state), the first gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified, and the transition determination means (41). ) Includes a second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state is higher than that of the first gaming state and the result of the transition determination is notified.
The game state transition means (41) is
In the first gaming state or the second gaming state, when it is determined by the transition determination means (41) to shift to the special gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state.
In the second gaming state, when it is not determined by the transition determination means (41) to shift to the special gaming state before the upper limit number of transition determinations is received by the transition determination means (41). , The gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state,
The disadvantage is that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special gaming state by the time the transition determination of half or less of the upper limit is received in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to Appendix C7, which is a feature.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices C7 to C10, the display regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means when a specific condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of a specific event triggered by the player getting a disadvantage. The content is controlled. Specifically, for example, when the normal jackpots are continuous, the misses are not consecutive jackpots, or the number of remaining STs is large in the ST machine, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled. To. That is, as a remedy for the player to get a disadvantage, information that can guess or recognize the profit information is given. As a result, the disadvantage to the player can be relieved, and the game is given the game property that the profit information can be guessed or recognized as the remedy for the disadvantage, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C11]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C10, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C11, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started? Can be enjoyed.

[Appendix C12]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The start of the predetermined period is from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-imparting game, which is transferred when the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix C11, which is set to.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C12, the result of the transition determination is the special game in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means is lower than that in the second gaming state. It is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-imparting game in the case of shifting to. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first hit special game and the start time of the value-imparting game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive villa, so an opportunity to estimate or recognize the profit status for each first hit is guaranteed. ..

[Appendix C13]
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-imparting game to the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C12.

[Appendix C14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C13, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game.

By the way, from the end of the value-imparting game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to the appendices C13 and C14, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-imparting game and the end of the jackpot game, a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. In that case, it becomes possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means by using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix C15]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C14, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C15, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-imparting game in the first special gaming state and the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the single-shot hit in which the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is used. The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state is used. If the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, the relevant The predetermined period ends from the end of the value-giving game in the first special game state to the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive villa ends and the end of the special game. Will be done. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive villa, a predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive villa, so that the predetermined period is longer than that of a single shot, and the more times the transition to the second special game state is performed, the more the predetermined period is set. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times a specific condition is satisfied per consecutive villa is higher than that per single shot, and the greater the number of consecutive villas per consecutive villa, the higher the number of times a specific condition is satisfied. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive villas increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized.

[Appendix C15]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C14, wherein the profit information display means (39,341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C15, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to give a game property that can adjust the difficulty of guessing the profit information depending on which information of the plurality of information is displayed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C16]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C15, wherein specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C16, since specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, it is possible to estimate profit information based on the corresponding relationship. .. As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the profit information while looking forward to which information of the plurality of information is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix C17]
The display control means (51) controls the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) according to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix C15 or Appendix C16.

[Appendix C18]
The appendix C17 is characterized in that, among the plurality of display areas, the display control means (51) targets a number of display areas corresponding to the number of times of the special conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C17 and the appendix C18, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can infer the profit status from the content displayed on the profit information display means and enjoy the profit state until the specific condition of the upper limit is satisfied in a predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit. You can also enjoy whether or not you are satisfied. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the game playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix C19]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C13 to C18, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C19, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such a profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip a profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing a complicated configuration of a game machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix C20]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C19, wherein the profit information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C20, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so that the profit information can be easily guessed or recognized, and the process of guessing the profit information without requiring advanced knowledge is simplified. You can enjoy it.

[Appendix C21]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C14 to C18, wherein the profit information display means (341) can display a profit status image suggesting or clearly indicating the profit status.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C21, since the profit information display means can display the profit state image in which the profit information can be recognized, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process for displaying the profit state image. Therefore, it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. As a result, the playability for estimating or recognizing the profit state is improved.

[Appendix C22]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The supplementary note C21 is characterized in that the profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination is variablely displayed. The game machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C22, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the decorative symbol that notifies or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when the image display means displays the variable display image in the game machine, the profit state image can be displayed by using the image display means. As a result, the profit status image is displayed by using the display means required for the game machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the profit status image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix C23]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of a number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. , The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C14 to C22, characterized in that they are executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C23, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, control of displaying the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information is performed in a predetermined order. Will be executed. Therefore, the player can infer and enjoy the profit state based on the number and order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

[Appendix C24]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C23, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C24, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) at which the profit status can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled, it is possible to impart a game property that can adjust the difficulty of estimating the profit information, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C25]
The display control means (51) follows an order specified by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix C24, which controls the display of the plurality of pieces of information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C25, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, with the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that are easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that are difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and by setting a large number of a plurality of order patterns or setting them so that they can be easily selected, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and it is early when the profit status is low. It is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine during the game from being stopped. Further, by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which it is easy to estimate or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns in which it is difficult to estimate or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy estimating the profit state.

[Appendix C26]
The game according to Appendix C23, wherein the display control means (51) controls the display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C26, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information randomly selected from the plurality of information is controlled. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being inferred or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. Further, unlike the game machine according to Appendix C25, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and memorize the order pattern, and the control required to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of information is simple. Be transformed.

[Appendix C27]
The additional note that the profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) that is an index indicating the payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C26.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C27, since the profit information is the performance information that is an index indicating the ball ejection performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball ejection performance. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix C28]
The advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting the advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. Further prepare
The gaming machine according to Appendix C27, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C28, since the profit information includes information on the advantage determination probability that has a great influence on the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine, the advantage determination probability can be estimated or recognized, so that the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine can be estimated or recognized. Can be estimated or recognized based on the index that is more appropriately reflected. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the advantage judgment probability, enjoys the game while expecting that the advantage judgment probability becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the advantage judgment probability. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix C29]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C27 or Appendix C28, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball ejection performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C29, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes the information indicating the ball ejection performance based on at least one winning opening among the plurality of winning openings, the player can eject the ball based on the winning opening. It is possible to guess or recognize the performance information indicating. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the game machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the game machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening becomes recognizable, and estimates the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix C30]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball.
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of different balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of balls launched to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to Appendix C29, which includes information on the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination is made by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball.

Since the gaming machine according to Appendix C30 includes information on the number of unit determinations as performance information which is advantageous information, information on the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low probability mode is not the time saving mode). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations, the player can infer or recognize the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal gaming state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting that the number of unit judgments can be recognized, and continues the game based on the estimation of the number of unit judgments or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix C31]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are made to pay out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of the game balls. The first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity and the general winning opening (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the winning of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening. Including
The performance information includes the number of balls to be paid out for the number of balls to be launched into the first winning opening (314) with respect to the number of balls to be launched to the game board (31) and the general winning opening (313). The gaming machine according to Appendix C29, which includes information on the payout rate (base), which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C31, since the performance information includes information on the payout rate as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the payout rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the ball output rate is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, the player can infer or recognize the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the payout rate, enjoys the game while expecting that the payout rate becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the payout rate. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix C32]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). The gaming machine according to Appendix C29, which includes information on a continuous accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the number of balls to be paid out to a ball entering.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C32, since the performance information includes information on the continuous bonus ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the continuous bonus ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the payout to the game balls to the variable winning openings. It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (balls in the special game state). It is an index showing the rate). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the continuous bonus ratio becomes recognizable, and plays the game based on the guess or recognition result of the continuous bonus ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not to continue.

[Appendix C33]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are the first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the game by the support of the electric accessory. The second winning opening (315), which allows the ball to enter and gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball in the special gaming state. Including possible variable winning openings (316),
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls entering the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). It is characterized by including information on the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix C29.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C33, since the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the accessory ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings, of the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. That is, the bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (short-time game state) supported by the electric bonus, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the information regarding the accessory ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state) and the support of the electric accessory are supported. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the support game state (short-time game state) to be received, and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special gaming state). As a result, the player enjoys guessing the character ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the character ratio becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the character ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix D1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
Profit information regarding the profit status of the player in the progress of the game (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode Profit information display means (39,341) that can display (etc.) and
A display control means (51) that controls display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) according to the number of times of a specific condition satisfied in a predetermined period.
With
The special game has a value-imparting game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value.
A gaming machine characterized in that the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started? Can be enjoyed.

[Appendix D2]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot) and the probability that the transition determination means (41) will determine to shift to the special gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the result of the transition determination is Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) that is shifted to the notified second gaming state (high probability mode).
The start of the predetermined period is from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-imparting game, which is transferred when the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, characterized in that it is set to.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D2, the result of the transition determination is the special game in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means is lower than that in the second gaming state. It is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-adding game when the game is transferred to. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first hit special game and the start time of the value-imparting game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive villa, so an opportunity to estimate or recognize the profit status for each first hit is guaranteed. ..

[Appendix D3]
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-imparting game to the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to Appendix D1 or Appendix D2, which is characterized by being played.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D3, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game.

By the way, from the end of the value-imparting game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to the appendices D3 and D4, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-imparting game and the end of the jackpot game, a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. In that case, it becomes possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means by using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix D5]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot) and the probability that the transition determination means (41) will determine to shift to the special gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the result of the transition determination is Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) that is shifted to the notified second gaming state (high probability mode).
The gaming machine according to Appendix D4, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D5, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-imparting game in the first special gaming state and the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the single-shot hit in which the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is used. The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, in the consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state is used. When the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without the predetermined period ending from the end time of the value-giving game to the end time of the special game. , The predetermined period is terminated from the end time of the value-imparting game in the first special game state to the end time of the special game. In other words, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive villa ends and the end of the special game. Will be done. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive villa, a predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive villa, so that the predetermined period is longer than that of a single shot, and the more times the transition to the second special game state is performed, the more the predetermined period is set. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times a specific condition is satisfied per consecutive villa is higher than that per single shot, and the greater the number of consecutive villas per consecutive villa, the higher the number of times a specific condition is satisfied. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive villas increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized.

[Appendix D6]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D5, wherein the profit information display means (39,341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D6, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to give a game property that can adjust the difficulty of guessing the profit information depending on which information of the plurality of information is displayed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D6, wherein specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D7, since specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, it is possible to estimate profit information based on the correspondence relationship. .. As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the profit information while looking forward to which information of the plurality of information is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix D8]
The appendix D7 is characterized in that, among the plurality of display areas, the display control means (51) targets a number of display areas corresponding to the number of times of the special conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D8, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can infer the profit status from the content displayed on the profit information display means and enjoy the profit state until the specific condition of the upper limit is satisfied in a predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit. You can also enjoy whether or not you are satisfied. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the game playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix D9]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D6 to D8, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D9, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such a profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip a profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing a complicated configuration of a game machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix D10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D9, wherein the profit information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D10, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so that the profit information can be easily guessed or recognized, and the process of guessing the profit information without requiring advanced knowledge is simplified. You can enjoy it.

[Appendix D11]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D6 to D8, wherein the profit information display means (341) can display a profit status image suggesting or clearly indicating the profit status.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D11, since the profit information display means can display the profit state image in which the profit information can be recognized, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process for displaying the profit state image. Therefore, it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. As a result, the playability for estimating or recognizing the profit state is improved.

[Appendix D12]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The supplementary note D11 is characterized in that the profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination is variablely displayed. The game machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D12, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the decorative pattern that notifies or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when the image display means displays the variable display image in the game machine, the profit state image can be displayed by using the image display means. As a result, the profit status image is displayed by using the display means required for the game machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the profit status image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix D13]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of a number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. , The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D12, characterized in that they are executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D13, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, control of displaying the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information is performed in a predetermined order. Will be executed. Therefore, the player can infer and enjoy the profit state based on the number and order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

[Appendix D14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D13, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D14, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) at which the profit status can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled, it is possible to impart a game property that can adjust the difficulty of estimating the profit information, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D15]
The display control means (51) follows an order specified by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. , The gaming machine according to Appendix D14, characterized in that the display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D15, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, with the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that are easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that are difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and by setting a large number of a plurality of order patterns or setting them so that they can be easily selected, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and it is early when the profit status is low. It is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine during the game from being stopped. Further, by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which it is easy to estimate or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns in which it is difficult to estimate or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy estimating the profit state.

[Appendix D16]
The game according to Appendix D13, wherein the display control means (51) controls the display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D16, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information randomly selected from the plurality of information is controlled. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being inferred or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to Appendix D15, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control required to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of information is simple. Be transformed.

[Appendix D17]
The additional note that the profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) that is an index indicating the payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D16.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D17, since the profit information is the performance information that is an index indicating the ball ejection performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball ejection performance. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix D18]
The advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting the advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. Further prepare
The gaming machine according to Appendix D17, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D18, since the profit information includes information on the advantage determination probability that has a great influence on the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine, the advantage determination probability can be estimated or recognized, so that the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine can be estimated or recognized. Can be estimated or recognized based on the index that is more appropriately reflected. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the advantage judgment probability, enjoys the game while expecting that the advantage judgment probability becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the advantage judgment probability. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix D19]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D13 or Appendix D14, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball ejection performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D19, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes information indicating the ball ejection performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning openings, the player can eject the ball based on the winning opening. It is possible to guess or recognize the performance information indicating. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the game machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the game machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening becomes recognizable, and estimates the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix D20]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball.
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of different balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of balls launched to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to Appendix D19, which includes information on the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination is made by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball.

Since the gaming machine according to Appendix D20 includes information on the number of unit determinations as performance information which is advantageous information, information on the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low probability mode is not the time saving mode). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations, the player can infer or recognize the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal gaming state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting that the number of unit judgments can be recognized, and continues the game based on the estimation of the number of unit judgments or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix D21]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are made to pay out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of the game balls. The first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity and the general winning opening (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the winning of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening. Including
The performance information includes the number of balls to be paid out for the number of balls to be launched into the first winning opening (314) with respect to the number of balls to be launched to the game board (31) and the general winning opening (313). The gaming machine according to Appendix D19, which includes information on the payout rate (base), which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D21, since the performance information includes information on the payout rate as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the payout rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the ball output rate is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, the player can infer or recognize the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the payout rate, enjoys the game while expecting that the payout rate becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the payout rate. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix D22]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). The gaming machine according to Appendix D19, which includes information on a continuous accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the number of balls to be paid out to the incoming ball.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D22, since the performance information includes information on the continuous bonus ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the continuous bonus ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the payout to the game balls to the variable winning openings. It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (balls in the special game state). It is an index showing the rate). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the continuous bonus ratio becomes recognizable, and plays the game based on the guess or recognition result of the continuous bonus ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not to continue.

[Appendix D23]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are the first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the game by the support of the electric accessory. The second winning opening (315), which allows the ball to enter and gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball in the special gaming state. Including possible variable winning openings (316),
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). It is characterized by including information on the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix D19.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D23, since the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the accessory ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings, of the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. That is, the bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (short-time game state) supported by the electric bonus, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the information regarding the accessory ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state) and the support of the electric accessory are supported. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the support game state (short-time game state) to be received, and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special gaming state). As a result, the player enjoys guessing the character ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the character ratio becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the character ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix E1]
Profit information regarding the profit status of the player in the progress of the game (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode Profit information display means (39,341) that can display (etc.) and
A display control means (51) that controls display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) according to the number of times of a specific condition satisfied in a predetermined period.
With
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information.
The profit information display means (39,341) is a gaming machine characterized by having a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to give a game property that can adjust the difficulty of guessing the profit information depending on which information of the plurality of information is displayed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, wherein specific information in a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E2, since specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, it is possible to estimate profit information based on the correspondence relationship. .. As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the profit information while looking forward to which information of the plurality of information is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix E3]
The appendix E2 is characterized in that, among the plurality of display areas, the display control means (51) targets a number of display areas corresponding to the number of times of the special conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E3, the display content regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can infer the profit status from the content displayed on the profit information display means and enjoy the profit state until the specific condition of the upper limit is satisfied in a predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit. You can also enjoy whether or not you are satisfied. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the game playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E3, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such a profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip a profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing a complicated configuration of a game machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E4, wherein the profit information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E5, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so that the profit information can be easily guessed or recognized, and the process of guessing the profit information without requiring advanced knowledge is simplified. You can enjoy it.

[Appendix E6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E3, wherein the profit information display means (341) can display a profit status image suggesting or clearly indicating the profit status.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E6, since the profit information display means can display the profit state image in which the profit information can be recognized, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process for displaying the profit state image. Therefore, it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. As a result, the playability for estimating or recognizing the profit state is improved.

[Appendix E7]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The supplementary note E6 is characterized in that the profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination is variablely displayed. The game machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E7, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the decorative pattern that notifies or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when the image display means displays the variable display image in the game machine, the profit state image can be displayed by using the image display means. As a result, the profit status image is displayed by using the display means required for the game machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the profit status image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E8]
The profit state image contains a plurality of image elements.
The display control means (51)
The plurality of image elements are displayed stepwise by the profit information display means (341) according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period.
The gaming machine according to Appendix E6 or Appendix E7, wherein the profit information display means (341) displays the profit state image when the specific condition of the upper limit is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E8, a plurality of image elements are displayed stepwise on the profit information display means according to the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can recognize the profit state when the specific condition of the maximum number is satisfied, and when the specific condition of the maximum number is not satisfied, the profit is made according to the number of the specific condition satisfied. It is possible to estimate and enjoy the profit state by combining the image elements displayed on the information display means, and also to enjoy whether or not a specific condition is satisfied up to the upper limit. In this way, the fact that the profit state can be recognized or estimated improves the game playability and can give the player a motivation to continue playing the game.

[Appendix E9]
The profit information display means (341) has a plurality of individual areas capable of displaying a plurality of profit state candidate images including the profit state image.
The profit information display means (341) displays the profit state candidate image in each of the plurality of individual areas when the specific condition is not satisfied in the predetermined period.
The addition: the display control means (51) changes the visibility of the profit state candidate image excluding the number of profit state images corresponding to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in E8.

[Appendix E10]
The display control means (51) is characterized in that the profit state candidate images other than the number of profit state image images corresponding to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period are invisible or difficult to see. The gaming machine described in Appendix E9.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E9 and the appendix E10, the visibility of the profit state candidate image excluding the profit state image is changed according to the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can recognize the profit status from the profit status image when the specific condition of the upper limit is satisfied, and the number of the specific conditions to be satisfied when the specific condition of the upper limit is not satisfied. It is possible to infer the profit status from the profit status candidate image with no change in visibility displayed on the profit information display means according to the situation, and also enjoy whether or not a specific condition is satisfied up to the upper limit. Can be done. In this way, the fact that the profit state can be recognized or estimated improves the game playability and can give the player a motivation to continue playing the game.

[Appendix E11]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of a number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. , The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E10, characterized in that they are executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E11, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, the control of displaying the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Will be executed. Therefore, the player can infer and enjoy the profit state based on the number and order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

[Appendix E12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E11, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E12, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) at which the profit status can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled, it is possible to impart a game property that can adjust the difficulty of estimating the profit information, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix E13]
The display control means (51) follows an order specified by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. , The gaming machine according to Appendix E12, which controls the display of the plurality of pieces of information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E13, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, with the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that are easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that are difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and by setting a large number of a plurality of order patterns or setting them so that they can be easily selected, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and it is early when the profit status is low. It is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine during the game from being stopped. Further, by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which it is easy to estimate or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns in which it is difficult to estimate or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy estimating the profit state.

[Appendix E14]
The game according to Appendix E11, wherein the display control means (51) controls the display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E14, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information randomly selected from the plurality of information is controlled. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being inferred or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to Appendix E13, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control required to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of information is simple. Be transformed.

[Appendix E15]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E14, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E15, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started? Can be enjoyed.

[Appendix E16]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The start of the predetermined period is from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-imparting game, which is transferred when the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix E15, which is characterized in that it is set to.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E16, in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than that in the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is the special gaming. It is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-imparting game when the game is to be transferred to. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first hit special game and the start time of the value-imparting game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive villa, so an opportunity to estimate or recognize the profit status for each first hit is guaranteed. ..

[Appendix E17]
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-imparting game to the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E16.

[Appendix E18]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E17, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game.

By the way, from the end of the value-imparting game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to Appendix E17 and Appendix E18, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-imparting game and the end of the jackpot game, a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. In that case, it becomes possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means by using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix E19]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The gaming machine according to Appendix E18, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E19, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-imparting game in the first special gaming state and the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the single-shot hit in which the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is used. The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state is used. If the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, the relevant The predetermined period ends from the end of the value-giving game in the first special game state to the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive villa ends and the end of the special game. Will be done. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive villa, a predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive villa, so that the predetermined period is longer than that of a single shot, and the more times the transition to the second special game state is performed, the more the predetermined period is set. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times a specific condition is satisfied per consecutive villa is higher than that per single shot, and the greater the number of consecutive villas per consecutive villa, the higher the number of times a specific condition is satisfied. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive villas increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized.

[Appendix E20]
The additional note that the profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) that is an index indicating the payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E19.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E20, since the profit information is the performance information that is an index indicating the ball ejection performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance of the game machine as the profit state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball ejection performance. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix E21]
The advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting the advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. Further prepare
The gaming machine according to Appendix E20, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E21, since the profit information includes information on the advantage determination probability that has a great influence on the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine, the advantage determination probability can be estimated or recognized, so that the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine can be estimated or recognized. Can be estimated or recognized based on the index that is more appropriately reflected. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the advantage judgment probability, enjoys the game while expecting that the advantage judgment probability becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the advantage judgment probability. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix E22]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E20 or Appendix E21, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball ejection performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E22, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes information indicating the ball ejection performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning openings, the player can eject the ball based on the winning opening. It is possible to guess or recognize the performance information indicating. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the game machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the game machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening becomes recognizable, and estimates the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix E23]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball.
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of different balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of balls launched to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to Appendix E22, which includes information on the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination is made by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball.

Since the gaming machine according to Appendix E23 includes information on the number of unit determinations as performance information which is advantageous information, information on the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low probability mode is not the time saving mode). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations, the player can infer or recognize the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal gaming state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting that the number of unit judgments can be recognized, and continues the game based on the estimation of the number of unit judgments or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix E24]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are made to pay out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of the game balls. The first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity and the general winning opening (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the winning of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening. Including
The performance information includes the number of balls to be paid out for the number of balls to be launched into the first winning opening (314) with respect to the number of balls to be launched to the game board (31) and the general winning opening (313). The gaming machine according to Appendix E22, which includes information on the payout rate (base), which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E24, since the performance information includes information on the ball output rate as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the ball output rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the ball output rate is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, the player can infer or recognize the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the payout rate, enjoys the game while expecting that the payout rate becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the payout rate. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix E25]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). The gaming machine according to Appendix E22, which includes information on a continuous accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the number of balls to be paid out to the incoming ball.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E25, since the performance information includes information on the continuous bonus ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the continuous bonus ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the payout to the game balls to the variable winning openings. It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (balls in the special game state). It is an index showing the rate). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the continuous bonus ratio becomes recognizable, and plays the game based on the guess or recognition result of the continuous bonus ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not to continue.

[Appendix E26]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are the first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the game by the support of the electric accessory. The second winning opening (315), which allows the ball to enter and gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball in the special gaming state. Including possible variable winning openings (316),
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls entering the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). It is characterized by including information on the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix E22.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E26, since the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the accessory ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings, of the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. That is, the bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (short-time game state) supported by the electric bonus, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the information regarding the accessory ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state) and the support of the electric accessory are supported. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the support game state (short-time game state) to be received, and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special gaming state). As a result, the player enjoys guessing the character ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the character ratio becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the character ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix F1]
Profit information regarding the profit status of the player in the progress of the game (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode Profit information display means (39,341) that can display (etc.) and
A display control means (51) that controls the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period.
With
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of a number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. , A gaming machine characterized in that it is executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F1, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, the control of displaying the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Will be executed. Therefore, the player can infer and enjoy the profit state based on the number and order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix F1, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F2, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) at which the profit status can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled, it is possible to impart a game property that can adjust the difficulty of estimating the profit information, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix F3]
The display control means (51) follows an order specified by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. , The gaming machine according to Appendix F2, which controls the display of the plurality of pieces of information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F3, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, with the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that are easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that are difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and by setting a large number of a plurality of order patterns or setting them so that they can be easily selected, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and it is early when the profit status is low. It is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine during the game from being stopped. Further, by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which it is easy to estimate or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns in which it is difficult to estimate or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy estimating the profit state.

[Appendix F4]
The game according to Appendix F1, wherein the display control means (51) controls the display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F4, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information randomly selected from the plurality of information is controlled. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being inferred or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. Further, unlike the game machine according to Appendix F3, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control required to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of information is simple. Be transformed.

[Appendix F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions F1 to F4, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F5, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started? Can be enjoyed.

[Appendix F6]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The start of the predetermined period is from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-imparting game, which is transferred when the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix F5, which is characterized in that it is set to.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F6, in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than that in the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is the special gaming. It is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-imparting game when the game is to be transferred to. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first hit special game and the start time of the value-imparting game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive villa, so an opportunity to estimate or recognize the profit status for each first hit is guaranteed. ..

[Appendix F7]
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-imparting game to the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E6.

[Appendix F8]
The gaming machine according to Appendix F7, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game.

By the way, from the end of the value-imparting game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to the appendices F7 and F8, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-imparting game and the end of the jackpot game, a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. In that case, it becomes possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means by using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix F9]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The gaming machine according to Appendix F8, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F9, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game in the first special game state and the end time of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the single-shot hit in which the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is used. The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state is used. If the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, the relevant The predetermined period ends from the end of the value-giving game in the first special game state to the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive villa ends and the end of the special game. Will be done. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive villa, a predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive villa, so that the predetermined period is longer than that of a single shot, and the more times the transition to the second special game state is performed, the more the predetermined period is set. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times a specific condition is satisfied per consecutive villa is higher than that per single shot, and the greater the number of consecutive villas per consecutive villa, the higher the number of times a specific condition is satisfied. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive villas increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized.

[Appendix F10]
The additional note that the profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) that is an index indicating the payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F9.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F10, since the profit information is the performance information that is an index indicating the ball ejection performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball ejection performance. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix F11]
The advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting the advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. Further prepare
The gaming machine according to Appendix F10, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

In the game machine according to Appendix F11, since the profit information includes information on the advantage judgment probability that has a great influence on the ball ejection performance of the game machine, the advantage determination probability can be estimated or recognized, so that the ball ejection performance of the game machine Can be estimated or recognized based on the index that is more appropriately reflected. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the advantage judgment probability, enjoys the game while expecting that the advantage judgment probability becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the advantage judgment probability. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix F12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix F10 or Appendix F11, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball ejection performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F12, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes the information indicating the ball ejection performance based on at least one winning opening among the plurality of winning openings, the player can eject the ball based on the winning opening. It is possible to guess or recognize the performance information indicating. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the game machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the game machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening becomes recognizable, and estimates the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix F13]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball.
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of different balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of balls launched to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to Appendix F12, which includes information on the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination is made by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball.

Since the gaming machine according to Appendix F13 includes information on the number of unit determinations as performance information which is advantageous information, information on the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low probability mode is not the time saving mode). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations, the player can infer or recognize the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal gaming state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting that the number of unit judgments can be recognized, and continues the game based on the estimation of the number of unit judgments or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix F14]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are made to pay out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of the game balls. The first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity and the general winning opening (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the winning of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening. Including
The performance information includes the number of balls to be paid out for the number of balls to be launched into the first winning opening (314) with respect to the number of balls to be launched to the game board (31) and the general winning opening (313). The gaming machine according to Appendix F12, which includes information on the payout rate (base), which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F14, since the performance information includes information on the ball output rate as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the ball output rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the ball output rate is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, the player can infer or recognize the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the payout rate, enjoys the game while expecting that the payout rate becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the payout rate. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix F15]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls entering the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). The gaming machine according to Appendix F12, which includes information on a continuous accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the number of balls to be paid out to a ball entering.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F15, since the performance information includes information on the continuous bonus ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the continuous bonus ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the payout to the game balls to the variable winning openings. It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (balls in the special game state). It is an index showing the rate). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the continuous bonus ratio becomes recognizable, and plays the game based on the guess or recognition result of the continuous bonus ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not to continue.

[Appendix F16]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are the first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the game by the support of the electric accessory. The second winning opening (315), which allows the ball to enter and gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball in the special gaming state. Including possible variable winning openings (316),
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls entering the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). It is characterized by including information on the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix F12.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F16, since the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the accessory ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings, of the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. That is, the bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (short-time game state) supported by the electric bonus, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the information regarding the accessory ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state) and the support of the electric accessory are supported. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the support game state (short-time game state) to be received, and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special gaming state). As a result, the player enjoys guessing the character ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the character ratio becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the character ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix G1]
Profit information regarding the profit status of the player in the progress of the game (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode Profit information display means (39,341) that can display (etc.) and
A display control means (51) that controls the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period.
An operation means that accepts operations by the player,
With
The display control means (51) displays the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) when the player performs an operation on the operation means when the specific condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized by controlling the contents.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, when a player performs an operation on the operating means when a specific condition is satisfied, the display content regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information displaying means is controlled. Therefore, the player can obtain a part or all of the profit information by operating the operating means when a specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the playability is improved by actively participating the player in order to display a part or all of the profit information on the profit information display means.

[Appendix G2]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information.
The profit information display means (39,341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.
When the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, it is possible to select a display area to be controlled by the display control means (51) from the plurality of display areas by operating the operation means. The gaming machine described in Appendix G1.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G2, the player can select a display area for displaying any information (a part of profit information) from a plurality of display areas when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player can estimate the profit state by selecting the display area at his / her own discretion and obtaining a part of the profit information. As a result, different information can be obtained by selecting a different display area each time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the profit state can be estimated and enjoyed based on a combination of different information.

[Appendix G3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G2, wherein the specific condition causes the player to predict an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses, and the player's prediction is correct.

[Appendix G4]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
The production means (341) in which the production is executed in the progress of the game, and
With more
The special game includes a plurality of special games having different advantages for the player.
The event is a transition determination from the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) to the transition to the special game until the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game. Addition that includes at least one of the number of times, the type of the special game when the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game, and the effect type executed by the effect means. The gaming machine described in G3.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix G3 and Appendix G4, if the player is made to predict an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses and the player's prediction is correct as a specific condition, the player changes. You can enjoy whether or not the prediction is correct in the game or the jackpot game. In addition, compared to the case where profit information such as information on game setting values can be passively estimated or recognized as the game progresses, the consciousness of participation in the game is improved, and the process of estimating or recognizing profit information is performed. You can enjoy it even more.

[Appendix G5]
When the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the display control of a number of display areas corresponding to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period from the plurality of display areas is performed by an operation on the operating means. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G2 to G4, which can be selected as a control target by means (51).

[Appendix G6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G2 to G5, wherein specific information in a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G5 and the appendix G6, a number of display areas corresponding to the number of special conditions satisfied in a predetermined period can be selected from a plurality of display areas by operating the operating means. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during a predetermined period, two or more of the plurality of information can be obtained by selecting a number of display areas according to the number of times. As a result, it becomes possible to obtain two or more pieces of information after a lapse of a predetermined period of time, so that it is possible to estimate and enjoy the profit state based on a combination of different information.

[Appendix G7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G1 to Appendix G6, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G7, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started? Can be enjoyed.

[Appendix G8]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The start of the predetermined period is from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-imparting game, which is transferred when the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix G7, which is characterized in that it is set to.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G8, the result of the transition determination is the special game in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means is lower than that in the second gaming state. It is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-adding game when the game is to be transferred to. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first hit special game and the start time of the value-imparting game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive villa, so an opportunity to estimate or recognize the profit status for each first hit is guaranteed. ..

[Appendix G9]
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-imparting game to the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G1 to G8.

[Appendix G10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G9, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game.

By the way, from the end of the value-imparting game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to the appendix G9 and the appendix G10, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the jackpot game, a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. In that case, it becomes possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means by using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix G11]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The gaming machine according to Appendix G10, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G11, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-imparting game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the single-shot hit in which the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is used. The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state is used. If the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, the relevant The predetermined period ends from the end of the value-giving game in the first special game state to the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive villa ends and the end of the special game. Will be done. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive villa, a predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive villa, so that the predetermined period is longer than that of a single shot, and the more times the transition to the second special game state is performed, the more the predetermined period is set. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times a specific condition is satisfied per consecutive villa is higher than that per single shot, and the greater the number of consecutive villas per consecutive villa, the higher the number of times a specific condition is satisfied. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive villas increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized.

[Appendix G12]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G1 to G11, wherein the profit information display means (39,341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G12, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to give a game property that can adjust the difficulty of guessing the profit information depending on which information of the plurality of information is displayed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix G13]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G12, wherein specific information in a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G13, since specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, it is possible to estimate profit information based on the corresponding relationship. .. As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the profit information while looking forward to which information of the plurality of information is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix G14]
The appendix G13 is characterized in that, among the plurality of display areas, the display control means (51) targets a number of display areas corresponding to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G14, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can infer the profit status from the content displayed on the profit information display means and enjoy the profit state until the specific condition of the upper limit is satisfied in a predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit. You can also enjoy whether or not you are satisfied. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the game playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix G15]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note G11 to Supplementary note G14, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting regions as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G15, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such a profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip a profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing a complicated configuration of a game machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix G16]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G15, wherein the profit information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G16, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so that the profit information can be easily guessed or recognized, and the process of guessing the profit information without requiring advanced knowledge is simplified. You can enjoy it.

[Appendix G17]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G13 to G16, wherein the profit information display means (341) can display a profit status image suggesting or clearly indicating the profit status.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G17, since the profit information display means can display the profit state image in which the profit information can be recognized, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process for displaying the profit state image. Therefore, it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. As a result, the playability for estimating or recognizing the profit state is improved.

[Appendix G18]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The supplementary note G17 is characterized in that the profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination is variablely displayed. The game machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G18, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the decorative pattern that notifies or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when the image display means displays the variable display image in the game machine, the profit state image can be displayed by using the image display means. As a result, the profit status image is displayed by using the display means required for the game machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the profit status image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix G19]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of a number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. , The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G1 to G18, characterized in that they are executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G19, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, the control of displaying the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Will be executed. Therefore, the player can infer and enjoy the profit state based on the number and order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

[Appendix G20]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G19, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G20, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) at which the profit status can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled, it is possible to impart a game property that can adjust the difficulty of estimating the profit information, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix G21]
The display control means (51) follows an order specified by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. , The gaming machine according to Appendix G20, which controls the display of the plurality of pieces of information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G21, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, with the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that are easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that are difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and by setting a large number of a plurality of order patterns or setting them so that they can be easily selected, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and it is early when the profit status is low. It is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine during the game from being stopped. Further, by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which it is easy to estimate or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns in which it is difficult to estimate or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy estimating the profit state.

[Appendix G22]
The game according to Appendix G18, wherein the display control means (51) controls the display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G22, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information randomly selected from the plurality of information is controlled. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being inferred or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to Appendix G21, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control required to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of information is simple. Be transformed.

[Appendix G23]
The additional note that the profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) that is an index indicating the payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G22.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G23, since the profit information is the performance information that is an index indicating the ball ejection performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball ejection performance. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix G24]
The advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting the advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. Further prepare
The gaming machine according to Appendix G23, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

Note: In the gaming machine according to G24, since the profit information includes information on the advantage judgment probability that has a great influence on the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine, the advantage determination probability can be estimated or recognized, so that the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine can be estimated or recognized. Can be estimated or recognized based on the index that is more appropriately reflected. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the advantage judgment probability, enjoys the game while expecting that the advantage judgment probability becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the advantage judgment probability. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix G25]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G23 or Appendix G24, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball ejection performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

Note: In the game machine according to G25, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes the information indicating the ball ejection performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning openings, the player can eject the ball based on the winning opening. It is possible to guess or recognize the performance information indicating. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the game machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the game machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening becomes recognizable, and estimates the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix G26]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball.
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of different balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of balls launched to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to Appendix G25, which includes information on the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination is made by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball.

Since the gaming machine according to Appendix G26 includes information on the number of unit determinations as performance information which is advantageous information, information on the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low probability mode is not the time saving mode). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations, the player can infer or recognize the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal gaming state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting that the number of unit judgments can be recognized, and continues the game based on the estimation of the number of unit judgments or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix G27]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are made to pay out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of the game balls. The first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity and the general winning opening (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the winning of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening. Including
The performance information includes the number of balls to be paid out for the number of balls to be launched into the first winning opening (314) with respect to the number of balls to be launched to the game board (31) and the general winning opening (313). The gaming machine according to Appendix G25, which includes information on the payout rate (base), which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G27, since the performance information includes information on the ball output rate as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the ball output rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the ball output rate is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, the player can infer or recognize the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the payout rate, enjoys the game while expecting that the payout rate becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the payout rate. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix G28]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). The gaming machine according to Appendix G25, which includes information on a continuous accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the number of balls to be paid out to a ball entering.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G28, since the performance information includes information on the continuous bonus ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the continuous bonus ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the payout to the game balls to the variable winning openings. It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (balls in the special game state). It is an index showing the rate). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the continuous bonus ratio becomes recognizable, and plays the game based on the guess or recognition result of the continuous bonus ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not to continue.

[Appendix G29]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are the first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the game by the support of the electric accessory. The second winning opening (315), which allows the ball to enter and gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball in the special gaming state. Including possible variable winning openings (316),
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls entering the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). It is characterized by including information on the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine described in Appendix G25.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G29, since the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the accessory ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings, of the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. That is, the bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (short-time game state) supported by the electric bonus, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the information regarding the accessory ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state) and the support of the electric accessory are supported. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the support game state (short-time game state) to be received, and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special gaming state). As a result, the player enjoys guessing the character ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the character ratio becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the character ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix H1]
Multiple winning openings (313-316) where prize balls are paid out by entering game balls, and
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A first discharge port (318) for discharging a game ball that has not been entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board.
The second discharge port (373) and the third discharge port (378), which can enter the ball in the special game and discharge the game ball flowing down the game area to the back side of the game board,
Profit information regarding the profit status of the player in the progress of the game (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode Profit information display means (39,341) that can display (etc.) and
It is displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) according to the number of times that the detection means (341) detects that the game ball has entered the second discharge port (373) in a predetermined period. A display control means (51) for controlling the display content related to the profit information, and
With
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) in which a game ball is allowed to enter in the special game.
The game ball that has entered the variable winning port (316) is distributed to the second discharge port (373), the second discharge port (373), or the third discharge port (378). A gaming machine characterized by further comprising a sorting means (37).

In the game machine according to Appendix H1, since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, whether or not the game balls are inserted into the second discharge port depends on the distribution means. The game property that it depends on the distribution of the game balls is given. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the sorting means regarding whether or not the game ball is inserted into the second discharge port.

[Appendix H2]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball.
A game ball launched in the left side region of the game board (31) can enter the first winning opening (314).
The gaming machine according to Appendix H1, wherein the variable winning opening (316) is capable of entering a gaming ball launched into the right region of the gaming board (31).

In the game machine related to Appendix H2, since the game ball launched in the left area of the game board can enter the first winning opening, it is necessary to perform so-called left-handed hitting in order to receive the judgment of transition to the special game. There is. On the other hand, since the game ball launched in the right area of the game board can enter the variable winning opening, it is necessary to perform so-called right-handed hitting in the special game. Then, the distribution means can distribute the game ball launched in the right region of the game board to the second discharge port. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate or recognize the profit state in the game for receiving the determination of transition to the special game, while it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state in the special game. In this way, since it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state when hitting the right side of a special game or the like, it is possible to give motivation to continue the game until the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game.

[Appendix H3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H1 or Appendix H2, wherein the second discharge port (373) is more difficult to enter the ball than the third discharge port (378).

[Appendix H4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H3, wherein the second discharge port (373) is provided above the third discharge port (378).

[Appendix H5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H3 or Appendix H4, wherein the second discharge port (373) has an opening area smaller than that of the third discharge port (378).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H3 to the appendix H5, since it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second outlet than the third outlet, it is difficult to satisfy a specific condition, and it is easy to estimate or grasp the profit state. is not it. Therefore, when the profit state of the player is low, for example, when the advantage judgment probability is low, the player can easily grasp that the advantage judgment probability is low, so that the game on the game machine is stopped at an early stage. The occurrence of the situation can be suppressed.

[Appendix H6]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The special game has a value-imparting game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) in which the variable winning opening (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H5, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H6, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started? Can be enjoyed.

[Appendix H7]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The start of the predetermined period is from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-imparting game, which is transferred when the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix H6, characterized in that it is set to.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H7, in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than that in the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is the special gaming. It is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-imparting game when the game is to be transferred to. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first hit special game and the start time of the value-imparting game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive villa, so an opportunity to estimate or recognize the profit status for each first hit is guaranteed. ..

[Appendix H8]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The special game has a value-imparting game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) in which the variable winning opening (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player.
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-imparting game to the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H7.

[Appendix H9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H8, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game.

By the way, from the end of the value-imparting game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to the appendices H8 and H9, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-imparting game and the end of the jackpot game, a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. In that case, it becomes possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means by using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix H10]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The gaming machine according to Appendix H9, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H10, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game in the first special game state and the end time of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the single-shot hit in which the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is used. The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state is used. If the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, the relevant The predetermined period ends from the end of the value-giving game in the first special game state to the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive villa ends and the end of the special game. Will be done. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive villa, a predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive villa, so that the predetermined period is longer than that of a single shot, and the more times the transition to the second special game state is performed, the more the predetermined period is set. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times a specific condition is satisfied per consecutive villa is higher than that per single shot, and the greater the number of consecutive villas per consecutive villa, the higher the number of times a specific condition is satisfied. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive villas increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized.

[Appendix H11]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H10, wherein the profit information display means (39,341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H11, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to give a game property that can adjust the difficulty of guessing the profit information depending on which information of the plurality of information is displayed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H11, wherein specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H12, since specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, it is possible to estimate profit information based on the correspondence relationship. .. As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the profit information while looking forward to which information of the plurality of information is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix H13]
The appendix H11 or the display control means (51) is characterized in that, of the plurality of display areas, a number of display areas corresponding to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period is controlled. The gaming machine described in H12.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H13, the display content regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can infer the profit status from the content displayed on the profit information display means and enjoy the profit state until the specific condition of the upper limit is satisfied in a predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit. You can also enjoy whether or not you are satisfied. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the game playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix H14]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H11 to H13, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H14, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such a profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip a profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing a complicated configuration of a game machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix H15]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H13, wherein the profit information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H15, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so that the profit information can be easily guessed or recognized, and the process of guessing the profit information without requiring advanced knowledge is simplified. You can enjoy it.

[Appendix H16]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H11 to H13, wherein the profit information display means (341) can display a profit status image suggesting or clearly indicating the profit status.

Note: In the gaming machine according to H16, since the profit information display means can display the profit state image in which the profit information can be recognized, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process for displaying the profit state image. Therefore, it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. As a result, the playability for estimating or recognizing the profit state is improved.

[Appendix H17]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The supplementary note H16 is characterized in that the profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination is variablely displayed. The game machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H17, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the decorative pattern that notifies or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when the image display means displays the variable display image in the game machine, the profit state image can be displayed by using the image display means. As a result, the profit status image is displayed by using the display means required for the game machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the profit status image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix H18]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of a number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. , The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H17, characterized in that they are executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H18, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, the control of displaying the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Will be executed. Therefore, the player can infer and enjoy the profit state based on the number and order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

[Appendix H19]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H18, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H19, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) at which the profit status can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled, it is possible to impart a game property that can adjust the difficulty of estimating the profit information, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H20]
The display control means (51) follows an order specified by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix H19, which controls the display of the plurality of pieces of information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H20, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, with the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that are easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that are difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and by setting a large number of a plurality of order patterns or setting them so that they can be easily selected, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and it is early when the profit status is low. It is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine during the game from being stopped. Further, by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which it is easy to estimate or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns in which it is difficult to estimate or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy estimating the profit state.

[Appendix H21]
The game according to Appendix H18, wherein the display control means (51) controls the display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H21, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information randomly selected from the plurality of information is controlled. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being inferred or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to Appendix H20, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control required to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of information is simple. Be transformed.

[Appendix H22]
The additional note that the profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) that is an index indicating the payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of H1 to Appendix H21.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H22, since the profit information is the performance information that is an index indicating the ball ejection performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance of the game machine as the profit state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball ejection performance. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix H23]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting the advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. Further prepare
The gaming machine according to Appendix H22, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

Note: In the gaming machine according to H23, since the profit information includes information on the advantage determination probability that has a great influence on the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine, the advantage determination probability can be estimated or recognized, so that the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine can be estimated or recognized. Can be estimated or recognized based on the index that is more appropriately reflected. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the advantage judgment probability, enjoys the game while expecting that the advantage judgment probability becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the advantage judgment probability. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix H24]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H22 or Appendix H23, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball ejection performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

Note: In the gaming machine according to H24, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes information indicating the ball ejection performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning openings, the player can eject the ball based on the winning opening. It is possible to guess or recognize the performance information indicating. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the game machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the game machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening becomes recognizable, and estimates the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix H25]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball.
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of different balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of balls launched to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to Appendix H24, which includes information on the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination is made by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball.

Since the gaming machine according to Appendix H25 includes information on the number of unit determinations as performance information which is advantageous information, information on the number of unit determinations can be inferred or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low probability mode is not the time saving mode). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations, the player can infer or recognize the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal gaming state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting that the number of unit judgments can be recognized, and continues the game based on the estimation of the number of unit judgments or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix H26]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are made to pay out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of the game balls. The first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity and the general winning opening (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the winning of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening. Including
The performance information includes the number of balls to be paid out for the number of balls to be launched into the first winning opening (314) with respect to the number of balls to be launched to the game board (31) and the general winning opening (313). The gaming machine according to Appendix H24, which includes information on the payout rate (base), which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H26, since the performance information includes information on the ball output rate as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the ball output rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the ball output rate is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, the player can infer or recognize the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the payout rate, enjoys the game while expecting that the payout rate becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the payout rate. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix H27]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). The gaming machine according to Appendix H24, which includes information on a continuous accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the number of balls to be paid out to a ball entering.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H27, since the performance information includes information on the continuous bonus ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the continuous bonus ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the payout to the game balls to the variable winning openings. It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (balls in the special game state). It is an index showing the rate). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the continuous bonus ratio becomes recognizable, and plays the game based on the guess or recognition result of the continuous bonus ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not to continue.

[Appendix H28]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are the first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the game by the support of the electric accessory. The second winning opening (315), which allows the ball to enter and gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball in the special gaming state. Including possible variable winning openings (316),
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls entering the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). It is characterized by including information on the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix H24.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H28, since the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the accessory ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings, of the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. That is, the bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (short-time game state) supported by the electric bonus, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the information regarding the accessory ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state) and the support of the electric accessory are supported. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the support game state (short-time game state) to be received, and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special gaming state). As a result, the player enjoys guessing the character ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the character ratio becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the character ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix I1]
Profit information regarding the profit status of the player in the progress of the game (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode Profit information display means (39,341) that can display (etc.) and
A display control means (51) that controls display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) according to the number of times of a specific condition satisfied in a predetermined period.
A retention means (38) for retaining a game ball that has passed through the specific area (373) in the predetermined period and releasing the game ball after the lapse of the predetermined period.
With
The specific condition can be satisfied when the game ball passes through the specific area.
The display control means (51) relates to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39,341) after the elapse of the predetermined period according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. A game machine characterized by controlling the display contents.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, since a specific condition can be established when the specific condition passes through the specific area, the player can easily grasp that the specific condition is satisfied. This makes it more enjoyable as to whether or not certain conditions are met. In addition, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the game ball passes through the specific area of the game area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the game playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through a specific area. Further, in the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means after the lapse of a predetermined period is controlled. Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the profit information based on the display content (part or all of the profit information) of the profit information display means after the lapse of a predetermined period. As a result, the game can be enjoyed in anticipation of what kind of content will be displayed on the profit information display means until the predetermined period elapses.

[Appendix I2]
The retention means (38) is a movable member (383) that can move between a first position (upper limit position) that restricts the movement of the game ball and a second position (lower limit position) that allows the movement of the game ball. With
The gaming machine according to Appendix I1, wherein the movable member (383) is in the first position at least at the beginning of the predetermined period, and is in the second position at the end of the predetermined period.

In the game machine according to Appendix I2, it is possible to switch between a state in which the game ball is retained and a state in which the game ball is not retained in the retention means by a simple configuration and control of moving the movable member.

[Appendix I3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I1 or Appendix I2, wherein the gaming ball retained in the retention means (38) is visible.

In the game machine according to Appendix I3, since the game balls retained in the retention means can be visually recognized, the player can easily grasp the number of game balls retained in the retention means (the number of specific conditions satisfied). .. Therefore, for example, when the player confirms that the upper limit number or more of the game balls are retained in the retention means, the player knows in advance that the profit information at the final stage in which the profit status can be recognized is displayed on the profit information display means. I can grasp it. Further, even if the number of game balls less than the upper limit is retained in the retention means, the profit is obtained based on the content (a part of the profit information) displayed on the profit information display means in consideration of the number of visually recognized game balls. The state can be inferred. As a result, the accuracy of estimating the profit status is increased and the enjoyment of estimating the profit status is also increased, so that the playability is further improved.

[Appendix I4]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The special game has a value-imparting game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value.
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix I1 to Appendix I3, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-imparting game.

In the game machine according to Appendix I4, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-giving game is started? Can be enjoyed.

[Appendix I5]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The start of the predetermined period is from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-imparting game, which is transferred when the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix I4, characterized in that it is set to.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I5, the result of the transition determination is the special game in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means is lower than the second gaming state. It is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-imparting game when the game is to be transferred to. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first hit special game and the start time of the value-imparting game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive villa, so an opportunity to estimate or recognize the profit status for each first hit is guaranteed. ..

[Appendix I6]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The special game has a value-imparting game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) in which the variable winning opening (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player.
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-imparting game to the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I1 to I5.

[Appendix I7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I6, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game.

By the way, from the end of the value-imparting game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to Appendix I6 and Appendix I7, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-imparting game and the end of the jackpot game, a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. In that case, it becomes possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means by using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix I8]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special gaming state. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state, and the transition determination is made. Including the second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified.
The gaming machine according to Appendix I7, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game and the end time of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I8, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-imparting game in the first special game state and the end time of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the single-shot hit in which the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is used. The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state is used. If the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, the relevant The predetermined period ends from the end of the value-giving game in the first special game state to the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive villa ends and the end of the special game. Will be done. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive villa, a predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive villa, so that the predetermined period is longer than that of a single shot, and the more times the transition to the second special game state is performed, the more the predetermined period is set. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times a specific condition is satisfied per consecutive villa is higher than that per single shot, and the greater the number of consecutive villas per consecutive villa, the higher the number of times a specific condition is satisfied. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive villas increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized.

[Appendix I9]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note I1 to Supplementary note I8, wherein the profit information display means (39,341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I9, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to give a game property that can adjust the difficulty of guessing the profit information depending on which information of the plurality of information is displayed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix I10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I9, wherein specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I10, since specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, it is possible to estimate profit information based on the correspondence relationship. .. As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the profit information while looking forward to which information of the plurality of information is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix I11]
The display control means (51) is characterized in that, of the plurality of display areas, a number of display areas corresponding to the number of times of the special conditions satisfied in the predetermined period are controlled. The gaming machine according to Appendix I10.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I11, the display content regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can infer the profit status from the content displayed on the profit information display means and enjoy the profit state until the specific condition of the upper limit is satisfied in a predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit. You can also enjoy whether or not you are satisfied. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the game playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix I12]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I9 to I11, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I12, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such a profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip a profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing a complicated configuration of a game machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix I13]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I12, wherein the profit information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I13, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so that the profit information can be easily guessed or recognized, and the process of guessing the profit information without requiring advanced knowledge is simplified. You can enjoy it.

[Appendix I14]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I9 to I11, wherein the profit information display means (341) can display a profit status image suggesting or clearly indicating the profit status.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I14, since the profit information display means can display the profit state image in which the profit information can be recognized, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process for displaying the profit state image. Therefore, it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. As a result, the playability for estimating or recognizing the profit state is improved.

[Appendix I15]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The supplementary note I14 is characterized in that the profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination is variablely displayed. The game machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I15, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the decorative pattern that notifies or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when the image display means displays the variable display image in the game machine, the profit state image can be displayed by using the image display means. As a result, the profit status image is displayed by using the display means required for the game machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the profit status image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix I16]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of a number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. , The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I1 to I15, characterized in that they are executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I16, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, the control of displaying the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Will be executed. Therefore, the player can infer and enjoy the profit state based on the number and order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

[Appendix I17]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I16, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I17, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled in a predetermined order. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) at which the profit status can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of the plurality of information is controlled, it is possible to impart a game property that can adjust the difficulty of estimating the profit information, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix I18]
The display control means (51) follows an order specified by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix I17, wherein the display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I18, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, with the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that are easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that are difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and by setting a large number of a plurality of order patterns or setting them so that they can be easily selected, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status, and it is early when the profit status is low. It is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine during the game from being stopped. Further, by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which it is easy to estimate or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns in which it is difficult to estimate or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy estimating the profit state.

[Appendix I9]
The game according to Appendix I16, wherein the display control means (51) controls the display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I19, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information randomly selected from the plurality of information is controlled. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being inferred or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to Appendix I18, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control required to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of information is simple. Be transformed.

[Appendix I20]
The additional note that the profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) that is an index indicating the payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of I1 to I19.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I20, since the profit information is the performance information that is an index indicating the ball ejection performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball ejection performance. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix I21]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) further equipped
The advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting the advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. Further prepare
The gaming machine according to Appendix I20, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I21, since the profit information includes information on the advantage determination probability that has a great influence on the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine, the advantage determination probability can be estimated or recognized, so that the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine can be estimated or recognized. Can be estimated or recognized based on the index that is more appropriately reflected. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the advantage judgment probability, enjoys the game while expecting that the advantage judgment probability becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the advantage judgment probability. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix I22]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I20 or Appendix I21, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball ejection performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I22, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes information indicating the ball ejection performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning openings, the player can eject the ball based on the winning opening. It is possible to guess or recognize the performance information indicating. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the game machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the game machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting that the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening becomes recognizable, and estimates the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix I23]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball.
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of different balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of balls launched to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to Appendix I22, which includes information on the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination is made by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball.

Since the gaming machine according to Appendix I23 includes information on the number of unit determinations as performance information which is advantageous information, information on the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low probability mode is not the time saving mode). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations, the player can infer or recognize the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal gaming state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting that the number of unit judgments can be recognized, and continues the game based on the estimation of the number of unit judgments or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix I24]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are made to pay out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of the game balls. The first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity and the general winning opening (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the winning of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening. Including
The performance information includes the number of balls to be paid out for the number of balls to be launched into the first winning opening (314) with respect to the number of balls to be launched to the game board (31) and the general winning opening (313). The gaming machine according to Appendix I22, which includes information on the payout rate (base), which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball to the entry of the game ball into.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I24, since the performance information includes information on the payout rate as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the payout rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the ball output rate is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, the player can infer or recognize the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the payout rate, enjoys the game while expecting that the payout rate becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the payout rate. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix I25]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). The gaming machine according to Appendix I22, which includes information on a continuous accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the number of balls to be paid out to the incoming ball.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I25, since the performance information includes information on the continuous bonus ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the continuous bonus ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the payout to the game balls to the variable winning openings. It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (balls in the special game state). It is an index showing the rate). Therefore, since the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the continuous bonus ratio becomes recognizable, and plays the game based on the guess or recognition result of the continuous bonus ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not to continue.

[Appendix I26]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are the first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the game by the support of the electric accessory. The second winning opening (315), which allows the ball to enter and gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball in the special gaming state. Including possible variable winning openings (316),
The performance information is based on the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls entering the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), and the game to the variable winning openings (316). It is characterized by including information on the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix I22.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I26, since the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio as the performance information which is advantageous information, the information on the accessory ratio can be inferred or recognized. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to be entered into the plurality of winning openings, of the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. That is, the bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (short-time game state) supported by the electric bonus, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the information regarding the accessory ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state) and the support of the electric accessory are supported. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the support game state (short-time game state) to be received, and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special gaming state). As a result, the player enjoys guessing the character ratio, enjoys the game while expecting that the character ratio becomes recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the character ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

10: Game machine 313: General winning opening 314: First winning opening 315: Second winning opening 316: Variable winning opening 341: Design display unit 37: Kroon device 37
373: Special out ball mouth 38: Game ball retention unit 391: Retention lane 393: Stopper unit 384: Special out ball sensor 39: 7 segment display unit 4: Main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
47: ROM
5: Voice lamp control device 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (7)

Profit information display means that can display profit information related to the profit status of the player in the progress of the game, and
A display control means for controlling the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means according to the number of times of a specific condition satisfied in a predetermined period.
With
The game machine is characterized in that the specific condition is satisfied when a specific event occurs during the progress of the game. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific event occurs when the player obtains a profit. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the specific event occurs when a player obtains a profit and a new profit is obtained by obtaining the profit. .. Further provided with a transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the specific event is a transition to the special gaming state. The special game has a value-giving game including a plurality of unit games in which the variable winning opening is opened and closed to give the player a game value.
The variable winning opening is opened when the unit game is started so that a game ball can be entered, and is closed by the passage of a predetermined time or the entry of an upper limit number of game balls.
The game machine according to claim 4, wherein the specific condition is that a game ball exceeding the upper limit number is inserted into the variable winning opening. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the specific condition is that the number of times determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determining means reaches a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific event occurs when the player receives a disadvantage.